2014 chevrolet captiva owner manual m britain... · chevrolet captiva owner manual - 2014 - crc -...

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Captiva Owner Manual - 2014 - crc - 11/27/13

2014 Chevrolet Captiva Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-1

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Luggage/Load Locations . . . . . . . 4-6Additional Storage Features . . . 4-6Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Information on Loading theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . 9-2Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-8Manual Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-26Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31


2014 Chevrolet Captiva Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Vehicle Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . 11-8

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

Your vehicle is a designedcombination of advancedtechnology, safety, environmentalfriendliness and economy.

This Owner's Manual provides youwith all the necessary information toenable you to drive your vehiclesafely and efficiently.

Make sure your passengers areaware of the possible risk ofaccident and injury which may resultfrom improper use of the vehicle.

You must always comply with thespecific laws and regulations of thecountry that you are in. These lawsmay differ from the informationin this

When this Owner's Manual refers toa repairer visit, we recommend yourChevrolet Service Partner.

All Chevrolet Service Partnersprovide first-class service atreasonable prices. Experiencedmechanics trained by Chevroletwork according to specific Chevroletinstructions.

The customer literature pack shouldalways be kept ready to hand in thevehicle.

Using this Manual. This manual describes all

options and features availablefor this model. Certaindescriptions, including those fordisplay and menu functions, maynot apply to your vehicle due tomodel variant, countryspecifications, special equipmentor accessories.

. The "In brief" section will giveyou an initial overview.

. The table of contents at thebeginning of this manual andwithin each chapter showswhere the information is located.

. The index will enable you tosearch for specific information.

. The Owner's Manual uses thefactory engine designations. Thecorresponding salesdesignations can be found in thechapter "Technical data".

. Directional data, e.g. left or right,or front or back, always relate tothe direction of travel.

. The vehicle display screens maynot support your specificlanguage.

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

{ Danger

Text marked{ providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.


iv Introduction

{ Warning

Text marked{ providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

{ Caution

Text marked Caution providesinformation on possible damageto the vehicle. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to vehicledamage.

We wish you many hours ofpleasurable driving

Chevrolet

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Captiva Owner Manual (GMK-Localizing-GME-7896196) - 2014 -crc - 11/27/13

In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Initial Drive InformationUnlocking the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 1-1Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-3Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 1-4Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-5Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Washer and Wiper Systems . . . 1-9Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . 1-10Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Initial DriveInformation

Unlocking the Vehicle

Radio remote control

1. LOCK button

2. UNLOCK button

See Radio Remote Control onpage 2-2.

See Central Locking System onpage 2-8.

Seat Adjustment

Seat positioning

To move seat forward or backward,pull the lever and slide seat todesired position.

Release the handle and make surethe seat is locked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-4.

See Seat Position on page 3-3.


1-2 In Brief

Seat backrests

Pull lever, adjust inclination andrelease lever. Allow the seat toengage audibly.

Do not lean on seat when adjusting.

Seat height

Pumping the lever on the outside ofthe seat cushion until the seatcushion is adjusted to the desiredposition.

To lower the seat cushion, push thelever down several times.

To raise the seat cushion, pull thelever up several times.

Seat lumbar support

To increase or decrease the driver'sseat lumbar support, move the leverforward or rearward.


In Brief 1-3

Head RestraintAdjustment

Height adjustment

Pull the head restraint upwards.

To move down press the catch andpush the head restraint downwards.

See and Head Restraints onpage 3-1.

Horizontal adjustment

Pull the head restraint forwards. Tomove back pull the head restraintforwards. Then it is movedautomatically backwards.

Safety Belts

Withdraw belt from reel, guide ituntwisted across the body andengage the latch plate in the buckle.

Tension the lap belt regularly whilstdriving by tugging the shoulder belt.

See Safety Belts on page 3-12.


1-4 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

To reduce dazzle, pull the lever onthe underside of the mirror housing.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-17.

Exterior Mirrors

Select the mirror you want to adjustby moving the selector switch to "L"for LH mirror or to "R" for RH mirror.

See Remote Control Mirrors onpage 2-16.

Steering WheelAdjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,then engage lever and ensure it isfully locked. Do not adjust steeringwheel unless vehicle is stationary.


In Brief 1-5

Instrument Panel Overview

LHD Vehicle


1-6 In Brief

RHD Vehicle


In Brief 1-7

1. Air vents

2. Turn and lane / Exterior lampcontrols

3. Horn

4. Instrument cluster

5. Windscreen wiper / Washer

6. Hazard lights / ESC OFF switch

7. Centre deposit box

8. DCS switch / Eco (stop/start)switch or Park assist switch

9. Combination switch

10. Card holder

11. Coin storage

12. Bonnet release lever

13. Steering wheel audio controls

14. Cruise control / Climate controlbuttons

15. Climate control systems

16. Gear lever

17. Electric parking brake (EPB)switch

18. Eco switch

19. Cigarette lighter

20. Audio system

21. Glove box

22. Front passenger seat beltreminder lamp / Passengerairbag OFF indicator

Exterior Lighting

To turn the exterior lamps on or off,turn the light switch knob. The lightswitch has four positions as follows:

O (OFF): To turn off all lamps, turnthe knob to OFF position.

All lamps are off and return knob toits original AUTO position.

AUTO: Exterior lamps andinstrument panel lamps areautomatically turned on or offdepending on external lightingconditions.

; : The tail lamps, number platelamps, and instrument panel lampsare illuminated.

5 : The headlamps and all of theabove lamps are illuminated.

See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.


1-8 In Brief

Headlamp main/dipped beamchanger

To switch from dipped to mainbeam, push lever.

To switch to dipped beam, pushlever again or pull.

See Headlamp Main/Dipped BeamChanger on page 6-3.

See Flash-to-Pass on page 6-4.

Hazard lights

Operated with the| button.

See Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-4.

Turn and lane-change signals

lever up = right indicator

lever down = left indicator

See Indicator and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6-5.


In Brief 1-9

Horn

Pressa

Washer and WiperSystems

Windscreen wiper

To operate the windscreen wipers,turn the ignition ON and move thewindscreen wiper / washer leverupward.

HI: Continuous wipe, fast speed.

LO: Continuous wipe, slow speed.

INT: Intermittent operation.

OFF: System off.

MIST: Misting function.

See Windscreen Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

Windscreen washer

Pull lever.

See Windscreen Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

See Washer Fluid on page 10-20.


1-10 In Brief

Windscreen Wiper/Washer

Rear Window Wiper

To operate the tailgate wiper, turnthe ignition ACC or ON and rotatethe end of the windscreen wiper/washer lever upward.

The tailgate wiper operates in thefollowing three positions:

OFF: System off.



See Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5-6.

Washer

Press the button at the end of thelever until the washers begin.

See Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5-6.

See Washer Fluid on page 10-20.

Climate Controls

Heated rear window, heatedexterior mirrors

Operated by pressing the=button.

See Heated Mirrors on page 2-17.

See Heated Rear Window onpage 2-21.


In Brief 1-11

Demisting and defrosting thewindows

Turn the air distribution knob toDEFROST5.

See "Defrosting windscreen" underHeating and Ventilation System onpage 8-1.

See "Demisting windscreen" underAir Conditioning System onpage 8-3.

Parking. Do not park the vehicle on an

easily flammable surface. Thehigh temperature of the exhaustsystem could ignite the surface.

. Always apply parking brakewithout pressing release button.Apply as firmly as possible ondownhill or uphill slopes.Depress the brake pedal at thesame time to reduce operatingforce.

. Switch off the engine andignition. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lockengages.

. If the vehicle is on a levelsurface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or P position beforeswitching off the ignition. On anuphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gearbefore switching off the ignition.Turn the front wheels towardsthe kerb.

. Close windows.

. Lock the vehicle.


1-12 In Brief

Transmission

Manual gearbox

To change gears, fully depress theclutch pedal, move the gear leverinto gear, and slowly release theclutch.

To shift into reverse, press thebutton on the back of the gear leverknob while moving the gear leverinto the reverse position.

See Manual Gearbox on page 9-14.

Automatic transmission

P (PARK): Locks the front wheels.Select P only when the vehicle isstationary and the parking brake isapplied.

R (REVERSE): Select R only whenthe vehicle is stationary.

N (NEUTRAL): Neutral gear.

D: For all normal driving conditions.Allows the transmission to shift intoall 6 forward gears.

+, -: Manual mode position.


In Brief 1-13

Push the release button to shift.Arrows indicate shifts that do notrequire you to push the releasebutton.

Depress the brake pedal and pushrelease button to shift.

Shifts that require you to push therelease button are indicated byarrows.

Shift freely.

Getting Started

Check before starting off. Tyre pressure and condition.. Engine oil level and fluid levels.. All windows, mirrors, exterior

lighting and number plates arefree from dirt, snow and ice andare operational.

. Proper position of seats, seatbelts and mirrors.

. Check brake function at lowspeed, particularly if the brakesare wet.

Starting engine with theignition switch

. Turn the key to position ACC,move the steering wheel slightlyto release the steeringwheel lock

. Manual gearbox: operate clutch

. Automatic transmission : Movegear lever to P or N.

. Do not accelerate


1-14 In Brief

. Diesel engine: turn the key toposition ON for preheating untilK goes out.

. Turn the key to position START,depressing the clutch pedal andbrake pedal then release whenengine is running

Before restarting or to switch off theengine, turn key back to LOCK.


Keys 2-1

Keys

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Radio Remote Control . . . . . . . . 2-2Open & Start System . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

DoorsTailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityAnti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

WindowsPower Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Heated Rear Window . . . . . . . . 2-21Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Keys and Locks

Keys

Replacement keys

The key number is specified on adetachable tag.

The key number must be quotedwhen ordering replacement keys asit is a component of the immobilisersystem.

See "Lock" under Exterior Care onpage 10-60.


2-2 Keys

Key with foldaway key section

Press button to extend.

To fold the key, press the button andfold the key manually.

Radio Remote ControlUsed to operate:. Central locking system. Anti-theft alarm system

1. LOCK button: Locks all doors.Hazard lamps will flash onceand the anti-theft system will beactivated.

2. UNLOCK button: Unlocks alldoors.

Hazard lamps will flash twiceand anti-theft system will bedeactivated.

In some countries, to unlockdriver's door, press the UNLOCKbutton once.

To unlock all doors, press theUNLOCK button again within3 seconds.

Note: LOCK and UNLOCK buttonsare not operated while the key is inthe ignition switch.

Note: When you press UNLOCKbutton on the remote keyless entrytransmitter, instrument panel lampswill come on automatically and stayon for about 30 seconds until theignition switch is in the ACCposition.

The radio remote control has anapproximate range of about6 metres(20 feet). This range canbe affected by outside influences.

The hazard lights confirm operation.

Handle with care, protect frommoisture and high temperatures andavoid unnecessary operation.

Fault

If the central locking system cannotbe operated with the radio remotecontrol, it may be due to thefollowing:. Range exceeded,. Battery voltage too low,


Keys 2-3

. Frequent, repeated operation ofthe remote control while not inrange, which will requireresynchronisation,

. Overload of the central lockingsystem by operating at frequentintervals, the power supply isinterrupted for a short time,

. Interference from higher-powerradio waves from other sources.

Radio remote control batteryreplacement

Replace the battery as soon as therange is noticeably diminished.

Batteries do not belong inhousehold waste. They must bedisposed of at an appropriaterecycling collection point.

Key with foldaway key section

Note: Use CR2032 (or equivalent)replacement battery.

1. Open the transmitter cover.

2. Remove the used battery. Avoidtouching the circuit board toother components.

3. Install the new battery. Be surethe negative side (-) faces downtoward the base.

4. Close the transmitter cover.

5. Check the operation of thetransmitter with your vehicle.

Fixed key

Have the battery replaced by arepairer.

{ Caution

Avoid touching the flat surfaces ofthe battery with your bare fingers.Handling will shorten battery life.

Note: Used lithium batteries canharm the environment.

Follow local recycling laws fordisposal.

Do not discard with householdwaste.

Note: In order to keep thetransmitter working properly, followthese guidelines:

Avoid dropping the transmitter.

Do not place heavy objects on thetransmitter.


2-4 Keys

Keep the transmitter away fromwater and direct sunlight. If thetransmitter gets wet, wipe it with asoft cloth.

Open & Start System

If the vehicle has the KeylessAccess System, the transmitter hasa thin button (A) near the bottom ofthe transmitter used to removethe key.

Press the button (A) and pull thekey out. Do not pull the key outwithout pressing the button (A).

The key, inside the transmitter, isused for the driver door key cylinderwhen the key fob is out of battery orit is in emergency.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

1. Q (Lock): Press once to lock theall doors. The indicator lampsflash once or the horn soundsonce to confirm locking.

2. K (Unlock): Press once tounlock all doors. The indicatorlamps flash twice and anti-theftsystem will be deactivated. In

some countries according tovehicle configuration, to unlockthe driver's door, press theUNLOCK button once. Then, tounlock all the doors, press theUNLOCK button again within5 seconds.

3. L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and hold for abouttwo seconds to locate thevehicle. The indicator lampsflash three times and the hornsounds three times.

Keyless Unlocking


Keys 2-5

With the keyless access transmitterwithin 1m, approach the front doorand push the button on the doorhandle to unlock and open the door.If the transmitter is recognised, thedoor will unlock and open.

{ Caution

The button on the door handle isused only for keyless unlockingfunction. When you leave vehicle,lock all doors by pushing the lockbutton in the keyless accesstransmitter or be sure to checkactivating the Keyless lockingfunction.

The ignition control knob can beturned to four different positions.

The keyless access transmittershould be inside the vehicle whentrying to turn the ignitioncontrol knob.

1: LOCK(Off)

2: ACC

3: ON

4: START. Manual gearbox: Operate clutch.

Turn the ignition control knob tothe START position, depressing

the clutch pedal and releasingthe Electric Park Brake switchwith brake pedal pressed whenengine is running.

. Automatic transmission: Movethe gear lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will notstart in any other position. Torestart the engine when thevehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, your foot mustbe on the brake pedal to startthe engine.

. Diesel engine: Turn the ignitioncontrol knob to the ON positionfor preheating untilN goes out.

Turn the ignition control knob to theSTART position.

When the engine begins cranking,let go of the ignition control knob, itwill return to the ON position.

If ignition control knob does not turn,try pushing the knob in and turningagain.


2-6 Keys

If the transmitter is not in the vehicleor something is interfering with thetransmitter, the Driver InformationCentre (DIC) in the middle of thecluster will display ELECTRONICKEY NOT DETECTED.

Keyless Locking

The doors are automatically lockedafter several seconds if the ignitionis off, all doors are closed and atleast one keyless access transmitterhas been removed from the interiorof the vehicle.

This function can be deactivated bypersonalisation setting.

At a self-service filling station,if driver gets out of the vehicle withthe keyless access transmitter, alldoors including fuel filler door andtailgate will be automatically lockedafter several seconds. Press thebutton on the door handle or pushthe unlock button in the keylessaccess transmitter to unlock alldoors including fuel filler door andtailgate during fuelling or whenfuelling is done.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only keyless access transmittersprogrammed to the vehicle will work.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery If the transmitter battery is weak, the

DIC in the middle of the cluster maydisplay ELECTRONIC KEY NOTDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. To start the vehicle,place the transmitter in the centreconsole storage area transmitterpocket with the buttons facing up.Then, with the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brake pedaland turn the ignition control knob.Replace the transmitter battery assoon as possible.


Keys 2-7

Battery Replacement

1. Remove the key from thetransmitter by pressing the thinbutton near the bottom of thetransmitter and pulling the keyout. Do not pull the key outwithout pressing the button.

2. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into theslot on the side of thetransmitter.

3. Remove the old battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

6. Reinstall the key into thetransmitter.

Door Locks

{ Warning

The temperature inside thevehicle can increase rapidly andreach much higher levels thantemperature outside.

Do not leave unattended childrenor pets in your vehicle.

Death or serious injury can occur.

Children can operate electricwindows, other controls, or movevehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Do not leave key in vehicle withchildren.

These actions can result inserious injury or death.

{ Caution

The button on the door handle isused only for keyless unlockingfunction. When you leave vehicle,lock all doors by pushing the lockbutton in the keyless accesstransmitter or be sure to checkactivating the Keyless lockingfunction.


2-8 Keys

Manual Door Locks Manually lock or unlock the driver'sdoor by turning the key in thekey slot.

To lock any door from the inside,pull the door lock button.

To unlock any door from the inside,push the door lock button.

Central Locking SystemYou can activate the central doorlocking system from the driver'sdoor. This system allows you to lockand unlock all the doors and tailgatefrom the driver's door, using either

the key or keyless remote (fromoutside) or the door lockswitch.(from inside)

Central locking button

You can also lock or unlock thedoors with the door lock switches onthe driver's door trim pad.

Press the right part of the switch tolock the doors.

To unlock the doors, press the leftpart of the switch.

To open a door from the inside oroutside, pull the door handle.


Keys 2-9

Note: Grease should be applied tothe door check latch and hinge atregular intervals or if a noise can beheard when opening, closing thedoor or during driving.

The driver's door and the frontpassenger's door can be opened bypulling the door handle from theinside even if the doors are lockedwith the door lock button.

Deadlock

For further protection when leavingthe vehicle, you can deadlock thedoors if the vehicle has theadditional anti-theft system.

Deadlocking electronically jams allthe electric locks so that no doorcan be opened, even if entry isgained by breaking glass.

{ Warning

Do not use deadlock if there arepeople in the vehicle. The doorscannot be unlocked from theinside.

To engage deadlock, do one of thefollowing:. Press the LOCK button twice in

succession. Press the LOCKbutton once to lock the vehicle,and then press it again (within3 seconds) to engage thedeadlock.

. Insert the key in the driver doorlock and turn the key twicecontinuously towards the rear ofthe vehicle. That is, once to lockthe doors, then a second time toengage the deadlock.

To disengage deadlock, pressUNLOCK button on the key. Thisunlocks the doors.

Note: Deadlock function operateswhen all doors and tailgate areclosed.

Note: Disengaging the deadlockoccurs when unlocking the doors inthe normal way.

Safety Locks

{ Caution

Do not pull the inside door handlewhile the child security door lockis set to LOCK position. To do socan damage the inside doorhandle.


2-10 Keys

{ Warning

Use the child security door lockswhenever children are occupyingthe rear seats.

You can use a key or suitablescrewdriver.

To operate the child security doorlock, turn the child locks intohorizontal position.

To open a rear door when the childsecurity door lock is activated, openthe door from the outside.

To cancel the child security doorlock, turn the child locks into verticalposition.

Doors

TailgateThe tailgate can be locked orunlocked by central door lockingsystem.

See Central Locking System onpage 2-8.

Make sure your hands and anyother body parts, as well as those ofother persons, are completely awayfrom the tailgate closure area.

{ Caution

When opening or closing thetailgate, be sure to check it is freefrom obstructions.

{ Warning

Driving the vehicle with thetailgate open can allow exhaustgases to enter passengercompartment.

Do not drive with tailgate open.

Exhaust gases are usuallypoisonous and can cause injuryor death.


Keys 2-11

On vehicles with the KeylessAccess System, if the vehicle islocked, the keyless accesstransmitter must be within 1 m of thetailgate for it to be recognised; thetailgate can then be opened by thetailgate release button above thenumber plate.

{ Caution

When unlocking the tailgate bythe tailgate release button, alldoors will also be unlocked. Afterclosing the tailgate, be sure topress the lock button on thekeyless access transmitter forvehicle security.

Vehicle Security

Anti-theft Alarm System

Type 1

Security indicator

Indicates the anti-theft system isworking.

The security indicator goes outwhen doors are unlocked using thekeyless entry transmitter or key.

The security indicator comes onwhen you lock the doors using thekeyless entry transmitter or key.

Door lock and anti-theft mode

Activation

1. Close all windows.

2. Turn the ignition key to LOCKand remove the key.

3. Have all passengers exit thevehicle.

4. Close all doors, bonnet andtailgate.

5. Press and release LOCK buttonon the transmitter.

The LED on the transmitter willflash.. All doors lock.. Hazard lights flash once.. Anti-theft mode is activated

after about 30 seconds.

If the key is inserted intothe ignition key hole, thetransmitter will not operatethe anti-theft system.


2-12 Keys

Note: The system can be activatedeven if the windows are open. Closeall the windows and doors beforeleaving the vehicle.

Note: If pressing the LOCK buttonon the transmitter when all doors,bonnet and tailgate are notcompletely closed, the anti-theftsystem is in the open state at thispoint and the security indicator willflash quickly.

The anti-theft system transits to thelocked state when all doors, bonnetand tailgate are completely closed.The security indicator will illuminatesteady when in the locked state.If the LOCK button is pressed afterall doors, bonnet and tailgate havebeen closed, the open state will bebypassed and the system will transitdirectly to the locked state with thesecurity indicator on steady.

Note: The anti-theft system isactivated if the doors are lockedmanually as well as the remotekeyless entry transmitter is used.

1. Confirm that the securityindicator flashes slowly afterilluminating for approximately30 seconds from the time thatthe system has entered thelocked state. If LOCK button onthe transmitter is pressed asecond time, the anti-theftsystem will activate immediately,by passing the 30 secondsdelay. The security indicator islocated in the right area of theclock.

{ Warning

Do not lock the vehicle if anyoneis to be left inside the vehicle.

Never leave children or petsunattended in your vehicle. Thetemperature inside the vehiclecan increase more rapidly andreach much higher levels than thetemperature outside.

This can result in serious injury ordeath.

Horn sound

The system provides visual (exteriorlamps flash) sign and audible (hornspulse) sound for about 30 secondswhen any of the doors, tailgate orthe bonnet are opened withoutusing the key or pressing the unlockbutton on the transmitter.

To stop the horn sound:. Press the LOCK or UNLOCK

button on the transmitter.. Unlock the driver's door with

a key.

(In some countries, doing somay not stop the horn sound.Press the LOCK or UNLOCKbutton to stop the sound) If theunauthorised entry still exists,the alarm sound will be activatedwith a periodic repeat.

If the system does not operate asdescribed above, have it checkedby a repairer. We recommend anauthorised repairer.


Keys 2-13

Siren sound

If your vehicle has additionalanti-theft system related toThatcham insurance, it has intrusionsensor, inclination sensor and glassbreakage detection sensor.

This system monitors the interiorspace through these sensors andactivates the siren if an intrusioninto the passenger compartment isdetected, the tyres are stolen or theunintended towing occurs.

To stop the siren:. Press the LOCK or UNLOCK

button on the transmitter.

If the unauthorised entry still exists,the siren sound will be activatedwith a periodic repeat.

Note: Alarming will sound if a dooris opened by a key when anti theftmode is activated.

Open the door using UNLOCKbutton on the transmitter.

Note: Tap the key hole or heat thekey if the door does not open withfreezing key hole in cold weather.

{ Warning

Do not use the transmitter to lockthe vehicle if anyone is to be leftinside.

The transmitter activates interiorprotection, which will trigger thesiren if movement is detectedinside the vehicle.

Never leave children or petsalone in your vehicle.

The temperature inside thevehicle can increase more rapidlyand reach much higher levelsthan the temperature outside.

This can result in serious injury ordeath.

If you want to turn off the additionalanti-theft system, press the buttonlocated on the headlining. Anti-theftoff indicatoro will come on.

When you activate the additionalanti-theft system by pressing thebutton again, anti-theft off indicatorwill go out.

Door unlock andanti-theft mode

Deactivation

1. Unlock the driver's door with akey. Or,


2-14 Keys

2. Press and release UNLOCKbutton on the transmitter.. The LED on the transmitter

will flash.. All the doors unlock.. Hazard lights flash twice.. Anti-theft mode is

deactivated.

In some countries, unlocking thedriver door with a key may soundalarm. Make sure to press theUNLOCK button on the transmitterto unlock doors.

Auto door relock

If the door is not opened or theengine is not started within30 seconds after disarming thesystem using the transmitter, all thedoors are automatically locked andthe anti-theft mode is reactivated.

Type 2

Activation

To activate the system, press thelock button on the keyless accesstransmitter.

Anti-theft alarm system is activatedafter about 30 seconds after keylesslocking function.

To activate the system, be sure tohave all doors, bonnet, and thetailgate locked.

To avoid setting off the alarm whenopening the tailgate, press thetailgate release button above thenumber plate. The keyless accesstransmitter must be within 1 m of thetailgate.

{ Caution

On the keyless access systemvehicle, when unlocking thetailgate by the tailgate releasebutton, all doors will also be

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

unlocked with the keyless accesstransmitter within 1m(3ft) from therear bumper fascia. After closingthe tailgate, be sure to press thelock button on the keyless accesstransmitter for vehicle security.

Deactivation

To deactivate the system, do one ofthe following:. Press the unlock button on the

keyless access transmitter.. With the keyless access

transmitter within 1m, approachthe door and push the button onthe door handle.

. Start the engine.

Immobiliser

Type 1

The immobiliser system provides anadditional theft deterrent to yourvehicle in which it is installed and


Keys 2-15

prevents it from being started byunauthorised persons. The valid keyfor a vehicle equipped withimmobiliser system is an ignitionkey with integrated transponder,which is electronically coded. Thetransponder is placed invisibly in theignition key.

Only valid ignition keys can be usedto start the engine.

Invalid keys may only open thedoors.

The engine is automaticallyimmobilised after the key is turnedto LOCK and has been removedfrom the ignition switch.

If the immobiliser system detects afault when the ignition switch is inON position, the immobiliserindicator will flash or illuminate andengine will not start.

Have the vehicle checked, werecommend an authorised repairer.

Note: Tap the key slot or heat thekey if the door does not open withfreezing key slot in cold weather.

Type 2

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed. Thevehicle is automatically immobilisedwhen the ignition control knob isturned to LOCK/OFF. Theimmobilisation system is disarmedwhen the ignition control knob isturned to ON and a valid transmitteris detected in the vehicle.

If the keyless access transmitter isever damaged, you may not be ableto start your vehicle. Theimmobiliser light in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system. Whentrying to start the vehicle, theimmobiliser light comes on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on. If theengine does not start and theimmobiliser light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition control knob off and tryagain.

If the ignition control knob does notturn, and the keyless accesstransmitter appears to beundamaged, try again. If the enginedoes not start and the immobiliserlight stays on, try another keylessaccess transmitter. If the ignitioncontrol knob does rotate, the firsttransmitter may be faulty. Or, youmay try placing the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket located under thecentre console.

If the ignition control knob still doesnot rotate with the other transmitter,or if the ignition control knob doesnot rotate by placing the transmitterin the transmitter pocket, the vehicleneeds service. See your dealer whocan service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new keylessaccess transmitter programmed tothe vehicle.


2-16 Keys

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.Immobiliser does not lock the doors.Always be sure to lock the vehicleto activate anti-theft alarm systemwhen you leave the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex MirrorsThe convex exterior mirror reducesblind spots. The shape of the mirrormakes objects appear smaller,which will affect the ability toestimate distances.

Remote Control Mirrors

Select the mirror you want to adjustby moving the selector switch to "L"for LH mirror or to "R" for RH mirror.

Adjust the selected mirror up, down,left or right using the correspondingedges of the mirror adjusting pad.

Folding Mirrors

Manual folding(Russia only)

For pedestrian safety, the exteriormirrors will swing out of their normalmounting position if they are struckwith sufficient force. Reposition themirror by applying slight pressure tothe mirror housing.

Power folding


Keys 2-17

{ Warning

Always keep your mirrors properlyadjusted, and use them whiledriving to increase your visibilityof objects and other vehiclesaround you. Do not drive whileeither outside rearview mirror isfolded back.

{ Caution

Do not operate mirror continuouswhile the engine is not running.

This will discharge the battery.

Heated Mirrors

Operated by pressing the1button.

Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a few minutes orby pressing the button again.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror

To reduce dazzle, pull the lever onthe underside of the mirror housing.

{ Warning

Your view through the mirror maylose some clarity when it isadjusted for night vision.

(Continued)


2-18 Keys

Warning (Continued)

Take special care with using yourinside rearview mirror when it isadjusted for night vision.

Failure to ensure a clear rearview while driving may result in acollision causing damage to yourvehicle or other property, and/orpersonal injury.

Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror

Electro-chromic mirror

Your vehicle may be equipped withElectro-Chromic Mirror(ECM), whichautomatically reduces glare fromvehicles behind you providinguniform light levels to your eyes.

To turn the ECM ON, press thebutton on the mirror cover. Theindicator light will be illuminated.The ignition switch must be in theON position.

To turn the ECM OFF, press thebutton again.

{ Caution

There are two light sensors whichdetect ambient light level andglare from vehicles behind you.

Do not cover the sensors or hangitems on the EC mirror.

Doing so may limit the ECMoperation and you may have nobenefit from it.


Keys 2-19

Windows

Power Windows

{ Warning

Take care when operating thepower windows. Risk of injury,particularly to children.

If there are children on the rearseat, switch on the child safetysystem for the power windows.

Keep a close watch on thewindows when closing them.

Ensure that nothing becomestrapped in them as they move.

Power windows can be operatedwith ignition ON.

Operate the switch for therespective window by pushing toopen or pulling to close.

Operation

You may operate the powerwindows when the ignition switch isON by using the power windowswitches on each door panel.

To open the window, press down onthe switch.

To close the window, lift up on theswitch.

Release the switch when thewindow reaches the desiredposition.

{ Warning

Body parts outside vehicle can bestruck by passing objects. Keepall parts of body inside vehicle.

Children can operate and becomeentrapped in power windows.

Do not leave your keys orunattended children in your car.

Serious injury or death can occurfrom misuse of power windows.


2-20 Keys

Auto down

The driver's window has an autodown function.

To lower the window, press downfirmly, then release the switch. Thewindow will open automatically untilit is fully open. To stop the windowwhile it is opening, press the switchagain.

To raise the window, pull up andhold the switch. To stop the window,release the switch.

Auto up/down

The driver's window has an auto up/down function.

To fully open the windowautomatically, press the switch fullydown. To fully close the windowautomatically, pull the switch fullyup. In automatic operation, thewindow will fully open or close evenif you let go of the switch.

To stop the window at the desiredposition while the window is inoperation, pull up or depress andrelease the switch to the oppositedirection of the movement.

Anti-pinch function

In case there is an obstacledetection while the driver's windowis closed automatically, the windowwill be opened automatically 11cmat least for safety.

{ Warning

Anti-pinch function may notoperate after six consecutivetimes operation. Do not operatethe window switch with nopurpose.

Child safety system for rearwindows

Press switchv to deactivate rearpower windows.


Keys 2-21

To activate pressv again.

Heated Rear Window

Heated rear window and windscreenwiper de-icer are operated bypressing the+ button.

Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a few minutes orby pressing the button again.

{ Caution

Do not use sharp instruments orabrasive window cleaners on yourwindscreen or rear window.

Do not scratch or damage thedefroster wires when you clean orwork around the windscreen orrear window.

Sun Visors

The sun visors can be folded downor swivelled to the side to preventdazzling.

If the sun visors have integralmirrors, the mirror covers should beclosed when driving.

{ Warning

Do not place the sun visor in sucha manner that it obscures visibilityof the roadway, traffic or otherobjects.


2-22 Keys

Roof

Sunroof

Sunroof

{ Warning

Take care when operating thesunroof. There is risk of injury,particularly to children.

Keep a close watch on themovable parts when operatingthem. Ensure that nothingbecomes trapped in them asthey move.

Sunroof can be operated withignition ON.

Open/Close

To open the sunroof, pull weakly theswitch backward. It will manuallyopen as a first step.

When you pull strongly the switchbackward then It will beautomatically and fullyopened(Second Step).

To close the Sunroof, keep pushingthe switch forward or downward untilit will be fully closed (only,manualoperation)

To tilt the sunroof up, press and holdthe switch upward.

To tilt the sunroof down, press andhold the switch downward.

Please release the switch when thesunroof reaches the desiredposition.

Note: The sunroof can be operatedfor up to 10 minutes or until a dooris opened when the ignition key is inthe LOCK position or out of theignition.

{ Caution

Periodically inspect the guide railfor dirt and clean if any dirt isaccumulated. If there is any dirtaround the rubber of the sunroof,noise can be produced whileoperating the sunroof.

Sunblind

The sunblind is operated manually.

Close or open the sunblind bysliding.


Keys 2-23

When the sunroof is open, thesunblind is always open.

{ Warning

Body parts outside vehicle can bestruck by passing objects. Keepall parts of body inside vehicle.

Serious injury or death can occurfrom misuse of sunroof.


2-24 Keys

2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front SeatsSeat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Folding Seat-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Three-Point Safety Belt . . . . . . 3-14Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Front Airbag System . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Side Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Curtain Airbag System . . . . . . . 3-19Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-20

Child RestraintsChild Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-21Child Restraint InstallationLocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Top Tether Child RestraintSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Head RestraintsPosition

{ Warning

Only drive with the head restraintset to the proper position.

Removed or improperly adjustedhead restraints can result inserious head and neck injuries incase of a collision.

Make sure that the head restraintreadjusted before driving.


3-2 Seats and Restraints

The middle of the head restraintshould be at eye level. If this is notpossible for extremely tall people,set to highest position, and set tolowest position for small people.

Height adjustment

Pull up the head restraints in orderto adjust the position upward. Pushdown the head restraints whilepressing the release button in orderto adjust the position downward.

Horizontal adjustment

To tilt the front head restraints,

1. Place it in its upright position bypushing it forward fully andreleasing it.

2. Push the head restraint forwardcarefully until it is adjusted to thedesired position.



Active Head RestraintsIn the event of a rear-end impact,the active head restraints at frontseats automatically tilt forwards. Thehead is more effectively supportedby the head restraint and the risk ofinjuries caused by hyperextension inthe cervical vertebrae area isreduced.

Front Seats

Seat Position

{ Warning

Only drive with the seat correctlyadjusted.

. Sit with your buttocks as farback against the backrest aspossible. Adjust the distancebetween the seat and the pedalsso that your legs are slightly

angled when touching thepedals. Slide the passenger seatas far back as possible.

. Sit with your shoulders as farback against the backrest aspossible. Set the backrest angleso that you can easily reach thesteering wheel with your armsslightly bent. Maintain contactbetween your shoulders and thebackrest when turning thesteering wheel. Do not tilt thebackrest too far back. Werecommend a maximum angle ofapprox. 25°.

. Adjust the steering wheel.

See Steering Wheel Adjustmenton page 5-2.

. Set the seat high enough tohave a clear field of vision on allsides and on all displayinstruments. There should be atleast one hand of clearancebetween your head and theheadlining. Your thighs shouldrest lightly on the seat withoutpressing into it.



. Adjust the head restraint.

See Head Restraints onpage 3-1.

. Adjust the height of the seat belt.See "Height adjustment" under

See Three-Point Seat belt onpage 3-14.

Seat Adjustment

{ Danger

Do not sit nearer than 25 cm(10in) to the steering wheel, topermit safe airbag deployment.

{ Warning

Never adjust seats while drivingas they could moveuncontrollably.

Seat positioning

To move seat forward or backward,pull the lever and slide seat todesired position.

Release the lever and make surethe seat is locked in place.

Seat backrests

Pull lever, adjust inclination andrelease lever. Allow the seat toengage audibly.

Note: Do not lean on seat whenadjusting.

Seat height

Pumping the lever on the outside ofthe seat cushion until the seatcushion is adjusted to the desiredposition.

To lower the seat cushion, push thelever down several times.



To raise the seat cushion, pull thelever up several times.

Seat lumbar support

To increase or decrease the driver'sseat lumbar support, move the leverforward or rearward.

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

Do not adjust the driver's seatwhile the vehicle is moving.

Driver could lose control of thevehicle and injury or propertydamage could result.

Seat slide adjustment

To move the seat forward orbackward, move and hold the switchforward or backward.

When the seat-back reaches thedesired position, release the switch.

Seat height adjustment

To adjust the height of the front orrear part of the seat cushion, pushthe front or rear part of the switch upor down.




Seat reclining adjustment

To tilt seat-back forward orbackward, move and hold the upperpart of the switch forward orbackward.


Heated Front Seats

The seat heater switches arelocated below the centre consolebox. To warm the seat:

1. Turn the ignition key on.

2. Press the seat heater switch thatyou want to warm. Indicator inthe button will be illuminated.

To turn off the seat heater, press theswitch again. Indicator in the buttonwill go out.

{ Caution

Prolonged use of the highestsetting for people with sensitiveskin is not recommended.

Folding Seat-back

Passenger's seat folding

{ Caution

If you fold the seat-back forwardto carry longer objects, such asskis, be sure any such cargo isnot near an airbag.

In a crash, an inflating airbagmight force that object toward aperson. This could cause severeinjury or even death. Secureobject away from the area inwhich an airbag would inflate.



{ Caution

Things you put on this seat-backcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

To fold the passenger's seat-back,do the following:

1. Lower the head restraint allthe way.

2. Pull up and hold the lever underthe front of the seat to slide theseat as far back as it will go andrelease the lever.

3. Lift the recliner lever, located onthe outboard side of the seat, upfully and fold the seat-backforward until it stops in thefolded position.

To raise the passenger's seat-back,do the following:

1. Lift the seat-back and push tooriginal position.

2. Latch the seat-back into placeby pushing on the top of theseat-back.

3. Pull the seat-back forward againto make sure the seat-back isproperly latched.

{ Caution

If the seat-back is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

That could cause injury to theperson sitting there. Always pushand pull on the seat back toensure it is locked.



Rear SeatsFolding rear seat-back

{ Warning

Do not stack luggage or othercargo higher than the front seats.

Do not allow passengers to sit onthe folded seat-backs while thevehicle is in motion.

Your vehicle has separate areasdesigned specifically for carryingcargo or passengers.

Unrestrained luggage orpassengers on a folded seat-backcan be thrown about within orejected from the vehicle in asudden stop or accident.

Serious injuries or death canresult.

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To fold down the rear seat-backsseparately:

1. Ensure all three of the seat beltsare unbuckled and the frontseat-backs are not reclined.

2. Push the head restraintsfully down.

3. Lift the lever located on the topof the seat-back to release theseat-back.

4. Fold the rear seat-back forwardand down.



To return a rear seat-back to itsoriginal position:

1. Hook the seat belts to theretaining guide to make sure theseat belts are not pinched.

2. Lift the rear seat-back and pushto original position.

3. Unhook the seat belts from theretaining guide.

4. Latch the seat-back into placeby pushing on the top of theseat-back.

5. Pull the seat-back forward againto make sure the seat-back isproperly latched.

{ Warning

Ensure that the rear seat-backsare all the way back and locked inposition before operating thevehicle with passengers in theback seat.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Do not pull the release levers onthe top of the seat-back while thevehicle is moving.

Pulling the release levers whilethe vehicle is moving can causeinjuries or damage to theoccupants.

Rear seat reclining adjustment

The rear seat-backs can be partiallyreclined.

To tilt the seat-backs, lift the leveron top of the rear seat-back until theseat-back is adjusted to the desiredposition.

Double folding rear seat (7seater only)

{ Warning

Do not stack luggage or othercargo higher than the front seats.

Do not allow passengers to sit onrear compartment when the rearseats are folded forward.

Unrestrained luggage orpassengers in rear compartmentcan be thrown about within orejected from the vehicle in asudden stop or accident.



{ Warning

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts.

Always unbuckle the safety beltsand return them to their normalstowed position before folding arear seat.

When double folding or unfolding,make sure the seat belt bucklesare not pinched by the seat.

Serious injuries or death canresult.

For third row seating entry or exit,do the following:

1. Ensure all three of the seat beltsare unbuckled and the frontseat-backs are not reclined.

2. Push the head restraintsfully down.

3. Pull the lever forward on theoutside of the seat-back and foldthe seat-back.

4. The seat will tumble forwardautomatically andair-pressurised support rods willhold the seats folded.

To return the rear seat to its originalposition:

1. Hook the seat belts to theretaining guide to make sure theseat belts are not pinched.

2. Guide the rear seatcushion down.

3. Lock the rear seat cushion onthe floor.

Make sure that the rear seatcushion is securely latched bypulling it up and down.



4. Return the rear seat-back to itsoriginal position. Make sure thatthe seat-back is securely latchedby pulling it back and forth.

5. Unhook the seat belts from theretaining guide.

{ Warning

Do not place the legs or otherbody parts on the floor under rearseat cushion when guiding therear seat cushion down.

Serious injuries can result.{ Caution

Do not pull the lever when theseat-back is folded. Thisoperation can cause damage tothe lever or related parts.

Folding the third row seat

To fold down the third rowseat-backs:

1. Ensure the seat belts areunbuckled.

2. Lift the lever on the back of theeach seat-back.

3. Seat-back seat-back forwardand fold the seat-back.



To return the rear seat to its originalposition:

1. Raise the seat-back to itsoriginal position. Make sure thatthe seat-back is securely latchedby pulling it back and forth.

2. Push the head restraintbackward to its original position.

Heated Rear Seats

The rear seat heater switch islocated on the each rear door panel.To warm the seat:

1. Turn the ignition key on.

2. Press the seat heater switch thatyou want to warm to heat the leftor right outboard seat cushionand seat-back.

Indicator in the button will beilluminated.

To turn off the seat heater, pressthe switch again. Indicator in thebutton will go out.

Safety BeltsSeat belts

The belts are locked during heavyacceleration or deceleration of thevehicle for the safety of theoccupants.

{ Warning

Fasten safety belt beforeeach trip.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

In the event of an accident,people not wearing safety beltsendanger their fellow occupantsand themselves.

Seat belts are only designed for useby one person at a time. They arenot suitable for people younger than12 years of age or shorter than150 cm(5 ft).

Periodically check all parts of thebelt system for damage and properfunctionality.

Have damaged componentsreplaced. After an accident, havethe belts and triggered belttensioners replaced by a repairer.

Note: Make sure that the belts arenot damaged by shoes orsharp-edged objects or trapped.Prevent dirt from getting into the beltretractors.

Seat belt reminder >. See SafetyBelt Reminders on page 5-17.

Front seat occupants

Each front seat is equipped withadjustable seat and seat-back withheight-adjustable head restraint,three point lap-and-shoulder seatbelts, and a supplemental restraintsystem (air bag).

Rear seat occupants

The rear seat is equipped with twooutboard seating positions and acentre seating position featuringthree-point lap-and-shoulder seatbelts.

Each outboard seating positions areequipped with child restraint loweranchors and the top tether anchorslocated on the back of the rearseat-back.

See Child Restraint InstallationLocations on page 3-23.

Third row seat occupants

The third row seat is equipped withtwo seating positions featuringthree-point lap-and-shoulder seatbelts.

Belt force limiters

In the front seats, stress on thebody is reduced by the gradualrelease of the belt during a collision.

Belt tensioners

In the event of a head-on or side orrear-end collision of a certainseverity, the front seat belts aretightened.

{ Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removalor fitting of belts or belt buckles)can trigger the belt tensionerswith risk of injury.



Deployment of the belt tensioners isindicated by illumination of controlindicator 9.

See Airbag and Seat belt TensionerLight on page 5-18.

Triggered belt tensioners must bereplaced by a repairer. Belttensioners can only betriggered once.

Note: Do not affix or installaccessories or other objects thatmay interfere with the operation ofthe belt tensioners.

Do not make any modifications tobelt tensioner components as thiswill invalidate the vehicle typeapproval.

Three-Point Safety Belt

Fitting

Withdraw belt from reel, guide ituntwisted across the body andengage the latch plate in the buckle.

Tension the lap belt regularly whiledriving by tugging the shoulder belt.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents thebelt from fitting snugly. Do not placeobjects such as handbags or mobilephones between the belt andyour body.

{ Warning

The belt must not rest againsthard or fragile objects in thepockets of your clothing.



Height adjustment

1. Press button.

2. Adjust height and engage.

Adjust the height so that the belt liesacross the shoulder. It must not lieacross the throat or upper arm.

{ Warning

Do not adjust while driving.

Removing

To release belt, press red button onbelt buckle.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy

Seat belt use duringpregnancy

{ Warning

The belt must be positioned aslow as possible across the pelvisto prevent pressure on theabdomen.

Safety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women.

Like all occupants, pregnant womenare more likely to be seriouslyinjured if they do not wear seatbelts.

In addition, when a seat belt is wornproperly, it is more likely that theunborn child will be safe in a crash.



To provide maximum protection, apregnant woman should wear athree-point seat belt.

She should wear the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possiblethroughout her pregnancy.

Airbag SystemAirbag system

The airbag system consists of anumber of individual systems.

When triggered the airbags inflatewithin milliseconds. They alsodeflate so quickly that it is oftenunnoticeable during the collision.

{ Warning

If handled improperly the airbagsystems can be triggered in anexplosive manner.

The driver should sit back as faras possible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle. If you aresitting too close to the airbag, itcan cause death or serious injurywhen it inflates.

For maximum safety protection inall types of crashes, all occupantsincluding the driver should always

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

wear their seat belts to minimisethe risk of severe injury or deathin the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to theairbag while the vehicle is inmotion.

The airbag may cause facial orbody scratch, injury by brokenglasses or getting a burn byexplosion while airbag isdeployed.

Note: The airbag systems and belttensioner control electronics arelocated in the central console area.Do not put any magnetic objects inthis area.

Do not stick anything on the airbagcovers and do not cover them withother materials.

Each airbag is triggered only once.Have deployed airbags replaced bya repairer.



Do not make any modifications tothe airbag system as this willinvalidate the vehicle type approval.

In the event of airbag deploymenthave the steering wheel, theinstrument panel, all panelling parts,the door seals, the handles and theseats removed by a repairer.

When an air bag deploys, there maybe a loud noise and smoke. Theseconditions are normal and are notdangerous but in case it maystimulate skin of the passenger.If the stimulation is continued,contact a doctor.

{ Danger

Never allow children or infantsand pregnant women and the oldand the weak sit in the frontpassenger seats fitted withairbags.

(Continued)

Danger (Continued)

Furthermore, do not drive with ababy seat fitted thereon. In caseof an accident, the impact fromthe inflated airbag can causefacial injury or death.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is impacted bybumps or objects on unpavedroads or pavements, the air bagmay inflate. Drive slowly on thesurfaces not designed for vehicletraffic to prevent unintended airbag deployment.

Control indicator 9 for airbagsystems.

See Airbag and Seat belt TensionerLight on page 5-18.

Front Airbag SystemThe front airbag system consists ofone airbag in the steering wheel andone in the instrument panel on thepassenger side. These can beidentified by the word AIRBAG.

The front airbag system is triggeredin the event of an accident of acertain severity in the depicted area.The ignition must be ON.



The forward movement of the frontseat occupants is retarded, therebyconsiderably reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and head.

{ Warning

Optimum protection is onlyprovided when the seat is in theproper position.

See Seat Position on page 3-3.

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Wear the seat belt properlyfastened. Only then the airbag isable to protect.

Side Airbag SystemThe side airbag system consists ofan airbag in each front seatbackrest.

This can be identified by the wordAIRBAG.

The side airbag system is triggeredin the event of an accident of acertain severity. The ignition mustbe ON.

The risk of injury to the thorax andpelvis in the event of a side-oncollision is considerably reduced.

{ Warning


Note: Only use protective seatcovers that have been approved foryour vehicle. Be careful not to coverthe airbags.



{ Warning

Children who are seated in closeproximity to a side airbag may beat risk of serious or fatal injury ifthe airbag deploys, especially ifthe child's head, neck, or chest isclose to the airbag at the time ofdeployment.

Never let your child lean on thedoor or close to the side airbagmodule.

Curtain Airbag System

The curtain airbag system consistsof an airbag in the roof frame oneach side. This can be identified bythe word AIRBAG on the roof pillars.

The curtain airbag system istriggered in the event of an accidentof a certain severity. The ignitionmust be ON.

The risk of injury to the head in theevent of a side impact isconsiderably reduced.

{ Warning


The hooks on the handles in theroof frame are only suitable forhanging up light articles ofclothing, without coat hangers. Donot keep any items in theseclothes.



Airbag On-Off SwitchFront airbag system for the frontpassenger seat have to bedeactivated if a child restraintsystem is to be fitted on this seat.The curtain airbag system, the belttensioners and all driver airbagsystems will remain active.

Front passenger airbag system canbe deactivated via a lock on theside of the instrument panel, visiblewhen the front passenger dooris open.

{ Warning

Deactivate front passenger airbagsystem when the front passengerseat is occupied by a child.

Activate front passenger airbagsystem when an adult is on thefront passenger seat.

Use the ignition key to choose theposition:

U = front passenger airbags aredeactivated and will not inflate in theevent of a collision. Control indicator/ illuminates continuously. A childrestraint system can be installed inaccordance with the chart.

V = front passenger airbags areactivated. No child restraint systemscan be installed.

As long as the control indicator/ isnot illuminated, the airbag systemsfor the front passenger seat willinflate in the event of a collision.

Change status only when thevehicle is stopped with theignition off.

Status remains until the nextchange. Control indicator for airbagdeactivation.

See Airbag On-Off Light onpage 5-18.



Child Restraints

Child Restraint SystemsWe recommend the GM childrestraint system which is tailoredspecifically to the vehicle.

When a child restraint system isbeing used, pay attention to thefollowing usage and installationinstructions and also those suppliedwith the child restraint system.

Always comply with local or nationalregulations. In some countries, theuse of child restraint systems isforbidden on certain seats.

{ Warning

NEVER use a rearward facingchild restraint on a seat protectedby an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front ofit, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURYto the CHILD can occur.

{ Warning

WARNING–EXTREME HAZARD

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Do not use a rearward facingchild restraint on a seat protectedby an airbag in front of it.

The child could be seriouslyinjured if the airbag inflates, asthe child's head would be veryclose to the inflating airbag.

{ Warning

When using a child restraintsystem on the front passengerseat, the airbag systems for thefront passenger seat must bedeactivated; if not, the triggeringof the airbags poses a risk of fatalinjury to the child.

This is especially the case ifrear-facing child restraint systemsare used on the frontpassenger seat.



Selecting the right system

The rear seats are the mostconvenient location to fasten a childrestraint system.

Children should travel facingrearwards in the vehicle as long aspossible. This makes sure that thechild's backbone, which is still veryweak, is under less strain in theevent of an accident.

Children under the age of 12 yearsthat are shorter than 150 cm (5 ft)are only allowed to travel in arestraint system that is suitable forthe child. Suitable are restraintsystems that comply with ECE44-03 or ECE 44-04. Since a properposition of the belt is rarely possiblewith a child that is shorter than150 cm (5 ft), we strongly advise theuse of an appropriate child restraintsystem, even though this might, dueto the age of the child, no longer belegally binding.

Never carry a child while travellingin the vehicle. The child will becometoo heavy to hold in the event of acollision.

When transporting children, use thechild restraint systems suitable forthe child's weight.

Ensure that the child restraintsystem to be installed is compatiblewith the vehicle type.

Ensure that the mounting location ofthe child restraint system within thevehicle is correct.

Only allow children to enter and exitthe vehicle at the side facing awayfrom the traffic.

When the child restraint system isnot in use, secure the seat with asafety belt or remove it from thevehicle.

Note: Do not stick anything on thechild restraint systems and do notcover them with any other materials.

A child restraint system which hasbeen subjected to stress in anaccident must be replaced.

Please ensure that infants andchildren are seated in the rear seatsusing child restraints.

Until the children can use seat belts,please select a child restraintsuitable for its age and make surethe child wears it. Please see theinstructions on the relevant productsfor child restraints.



Child Restraint Installation Locations

Permissible options for fitting a child restraint system

Weight class

On front passenger seat

On outboardseats in thesecond row

On centreseat in thesecond row

On the seatsin the

third row

On the seatsin the

third row

On the seatsin the

third row

Group 0 up to 10 kg X U1 U+ X X

Group 0+ up to 13 kg X U1 U+ X X

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U1 U+ X X

Group II 15 to 25 kg X X U X X

Group III 22 to 36 kg X X U X X

1: Only if front passenger seatairbag systems are deactivated.If the child restraint system is beingsecured using a three-point seatbelt, adjust the seat backrest angleto the most forward position andensure that vehicle seat belt runsforwards from the upper anchoragepoint.

+: Seat available with ISOFIX andTop-Tether mounting brackets.

U: Universal suitability inconjunction with three-pointseat belt.

X: No child restraint systempermitted in this weight class.



Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system

Weight Class Size Class Fixture

On frontpassenger

seat

Onoutboard

seats in thesecond row

On centreseat in thesecond row

On theseats in thethird row

Group 0 up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL X X

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X IL X X

D ISO/R2 X IL X X

C ISO/R3 X IL X X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X IL X X

C ISO/R3 X IL X X

B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF X X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF X X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF X X

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIXrestraint systems of the'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or'semi-universal' categories.

The ISOFIX restraint system mustbe approved for the specificvehicle type.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIXforward-facing child restraintsystems of universal categoryapproved for use in this massgroup.

X: No ISOFIX child restraint systemapproved in this weight class.

ISOFIX size class and seatdevice

A - ISO/F3: Forward-facing childrestraint system for children ofmaximum size in the weight class 9to 18 kg.



B - ISO/F2: Forward-facing childrestraint system for smaller childrenin the weight class 9 to 18 kg.

B1 - ISO/F2X: Forward-facing childrestraint system for smaller childrenin the weight class 9 to 18 kg.

C - ISO/R3: Rear-facing childrestraint system for children ofmaximum size in the weight classup to 13 kg.

D - ISO/R2: Rear-facing childrestraint system for smaller childrenin the weight class up to 13 kg.

E - ISO/R1: Rear-facing childrestraint system for young childrenin the weight class up to 13 kg.

ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems

In the past, child restraints havebeen attached to a vehicle's seat byseat belts.

As a result, child restraints wereoften installed incorrectly or tooloosely to adequately protect yourchild.

We now equip your vehicle withISOFIX low anchorages at the tworear outboard seating positions andwith top tether anchorages in the

rear seat backward allowing childrestraints to be attached to the rearseats.

To install a child restraint whichcomes equipped with ISOFIX lowand top tether anchorageattachments, follow the instructionssupplied with your child restraint.

Please take the time to carefullyread and follow all of theinstructions on the following pagesand the instructions supplied withyour child restraint.

Your child's safety depends on it!

If you have questions, or any doubtswhether you have installed yourchild restraint properly, contact thechild restraint manufacturer. If youare still having trouble installing thechild restraint in your vehicle, werecommend that you consult anauthorised repairer.



Installation of ISOFIX child restraintsystems

1. Select one of the rear outboardseating positions for installationof the child restraint.

2. Locate the two lower anchorpositions.

The location of each loweranchor is identified with acircular marking on the loweredge of the rear seat-back.

3. Make sure there are no foreignobjects around lower anchors,including seat belt buckles or

seat belts. Foreign objects caninterfere with the proper latchingof the child restraint to theanchors.

4. Place the child restraint on theseat over the two lower anchorsand attach it to the anchorsfollowing the instructionssupplied with the child restraint.

5. Adjust and tighten the childrestraint according to theinstructions supplied with thechild restraint.

{ Caution

Unused child restraint systemcould move forward.

Remove child restraint system ifnot in use, or secure it withseat belt.

Note: Since a seat belt or childrestraint system can become veryhot if it is left in a closed vehicle, besure and check the seat cover andbuckles before placing a child there.

{ Warning

Use all ISOFIX low and top tetheranchorages for their designedpurpose only.

ISOFIX low and top tetheranchorages are designed only tohold child restraints which comeequipped with low and topanchorage attachments.

Do not use ISOFIX low and toptether anchorages to hold adultseat belts, harnesses, or otheritems of equipment in yourvehicle.

Using ISOFIX low and top tetheranchorages to hold adult seatbelts, harnesses, or other items orequipment in your vehicle will not

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

provide adequate protection in thecase of a collision and couldresult in injuries or even death.

{ Warning

Child restraint system placed inthe front seat could cause seriousinjury or death.

Never install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat of avehicle equipped with a frontpassenger air bag.

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint installed in the front seatcan be seriously injured if thefront passenger air bag inflates.

Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

A front-facing child restraintshould be secured in the rearseat whenever possible.

If installed in the front passengerseat, adjust the seat as far backas it will go.

{ Caution

Full size rear facing child seatsmay not be suitable forinstallation. Contact your retailerfor information regarding suitablechild restraint systems.

Installation of child restraints withISOFIX low and top tetheranchorage attachments.

Top Tether ChildRestraint Systems

To access the top tether anchorpoints, do the following:

1. Remove the foreign objectsaround the top tether anchor.

Remove the luggagecompartment cover.



2. Attach the clip on the childrestraint's tether strap to the toptether anchor, making sure toremove any twists in the tetherstrap.

If the position you are using hasan adjustable head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether around the headrestraint.

If the position you are using hasan adjustable head restraint andyou are using a single tether,raise the head restraint androute the tether under the headrestraint and in between thehead restraint posts.

3. Tighten the child restraint'stether strap according to theinstructions supplied with thechild restraint.

4. Push and pull on the childrestraint after installation to besure the child restraint is secure.

{ Warning

Make sure the clip on the childrestraint's tether strap is properlyattached to the top tetheranchorage.

Incorrect attachment could renderthe tether strap and top tetheranchorage ineffective.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Centre Console Storage . . . . . . 4-4Roof Panelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Luggage/Load LocationsLuggage Compartment . . . . . . . . 4-6

Additional Storage FeaturesLoad Compartment Cover . . . . . 4-6

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Information on Loading theVehicleInformation on Loading theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

The storages are located in theinstrument panel. It is used for smallarticles, etc.


4-2 Storage

Card holder

You can use the card holder byinserting a card into slot.

Coin storage

To open the coin storage, pull thehandle on the coin storage doortoward you.

To close the coin storage, firmlypush the coin storage door shut.

Glove Box

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle upward andthe glove box lamp will be turnedon. Close the glove box with a firmpush and the glove box lamp will beturned off.


Storage 4-3

The inner partition can be removedif you want to store larger items.

After taking inner partition off, keepit in the left side groove of theglove box.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or a sudden stop, alwayskeep the glovebox door closedwhile driving.

Cupholders

The cup holders are located in thecentre console and in the secondrow seat armrest.

To use the rear cup holder, push thebutton above the cup holder. Therear cup holder will pop outautomatically.

{ Warning

Do not place uncovered cups ofhot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you burn yourself.Such a burn to the driver couldlead to loss of control of thevehicle.

To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not placeuncovered or unsecured bottles,glasses, cans, etc., in the cupholder while the vehicle is inmotion.


4-4 Storage

Sunglasses Storage

Fold down to open.

{ Caution

Do not use for storing heavyobjects.

Underseat Storage

To use the front passenger seatundertray, pull up on the end of thetray and pull it toward the instrumentpanel. Push the tray toward the seatto return it to its original position.

Centre Console Storage

To open the console box, pull up onthe lever and lift lid.

To close the console box, lower thelid and push it down until it latches.


Storage 4-5

You can use another storage bypressing and pushing the lever onthe cup holders.

Roof Panelling

Assist grip with coat hook

Your vehicle has assist grips abovethe front seat passenger's door andthe rear doors. The grip above eachrear door includes coat hook.

To use the assist grips, pull downand hold it. The grips will swing upautomatically when releasing it.

Passengers can use the grips forassistance in entering / exiting thevehicle, or for hand-holds duringspirited driving.

{ Caution

Hanging items on your vehicle'sassist grips can obstruct thedriver's view.

Do not hang anything on theassist grips, unless they areequipped with a coat hook.

Obstructing the driver's view canlead to an accident resulting inpersonal injuries and damage toyour vehicle or other property.


4-6 Storage

Luggage/LoadLocations

Luggage Compartment

Under floor storage

There is storage under the luggagecompartment floor. To access thefloor storage, pull floor mat handleupward.

{ Caution

Do not allow items in the storageto extend above the top of thestorage. Otherwise, the storage orluggage floor may be damaged.

Rear storage

In the both sides of the luggagecompartment floor, there are floorside trays.

Additional StorageFeatures

Load Compartment Cover

Luggage or other cargo placed inthe luggage compartment can behidden from view by a luggagecompartment cover.

To operate the cover, pull the handleof the cover toward you and theninsert the retainer into the slotlocated on both sides of the tailgateopenings.


Storage 4-7

To remove the cover, release thehandle after pulling it toward you alittle. The cover retractsautomatically.

Roof Rack SystemRoof rack

The roof rack can be used toconveniently carry additional cargo,or bulky items, such as bicycles,which are better carried outsidethan inside. The roof rack has siderails attached to the roof. Consult anauthorised repairer for details andregulations on driving with a loadedroof rack.

Ensure that the load is evenlydistributed over the side or crossrails. The roof surface must not beloaded.

A loaded luggage carrier alters thevehicle's centre of gravity. Drivecarefully when in crosswinds and donot drive at high speeds.

To prevent damage or loss of cargoas you are driving, check frequentlyto make sure your cargo aresecurely fastened.

{ Warning

If you try to carry something ontop of your vehicle that is longeror wider than the roof rack, thewind can catch it as you drivealong. This can cause you to losecontrol. What you are carryingcould be torn off violently, and thiscould cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of coursedamage your vehicle.

Never carry something longer orwider than the roof rack on top ofyour vehicle.

A loaded roof rack changes thevehicle's centre of gravity. Do notdrive at high speeds. Takeprecautions when driving incrosswinds.

Failure to follow this caution canresult in vehicle damage andpersonal injury.

(Continued)


4-8 Storage

Warning (Continued)

The maximum load for the roofrack rails is 220 lbs (100 kg). Donot exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading yourvehicle.

Information onLoading the VehicleInformation on loading thevehicle. Heavy objects in the tailgate

should be placed against theseat backrests. Ensure thebackrests are securely engaged.If objects can be stacked, theheavier objects should be placedat the bottom.

. Secure objects in tailgate toprevent sliding.

. When transporting objects in thetailgate, the backrests of the rearseats must not be angledforward.

. Do not allow the load to protrudeabove the upper edge of thebackrests.

. Do not place any objects on thetailgate cover or the instrumentpanel, do not cover the sensoron top of the instrument panel.

. The load must not obstruct theoperation of the pedals, parkingbrake and gear selector,or hinder the freedom ofmovement of the driver. Do notplace any unsecured objects inthe interior.

. Do not drive with an opentailgate.

. The payload is the differencebetween the permitted grossvehicle weight (See IdentificationPlate on page 12-1) and thekerb weight.

For the kerb weight indetail,refer to the technical datasection.


Storage 4-9

. Driving with a roof loadincreases the sensitivity of thevehicle to cross-winds and has adetrimental effect on vehiclehandling due to the vehicle'shigher centre of gravity.Distribute the load evenly andsecure it properly with retainingstraps. Adjust the tyre pressureand vehicle speed according tothe load conditions. Check andretighten the straps frequently.


4-10 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Power Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warning LightsSpeedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Mileometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Rev Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Transmission Display . . . . . . . . 5-17Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-17Airbag and Safety BeltTensioner Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-19MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

All-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Descent Control SystemLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Pre-Heat Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Diesel Particulate FilterLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23Low Engine Oil LevelLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . 5-24Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24Water in Fuel WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Immobiliser Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Apply Foot brake Light . . . . . . . 5-25Main-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Rear Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Tail lamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26Trailer Indicator Light . . . . . . . . 5-26Bonnet Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCentre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-28Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-29

Trip ComputerTrip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,then engage lever and ensure it isfully locked.

Do not adjust steering wheel unlessvehicle is stationary.

{ Caution

If strong impact delivers tosteering column axle directionwhen the steering wheel isadjusted or the lever is locked, itmay cause damage to the partsrelated to steering wheel.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reached the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 10 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.



Steering Wheel Controls

The climate control system and thecruise control can be operated bythe controls on the steering wheel.

See Electronic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-13.

See Cruise Control on page 9-24.

Horn

Pressa.

Windscreen Wiper/Washer

windscreen wiper

To operate the windscreen wipers,turn the ignition ON and move thewindscreen wiper / washer leverupward.

HI: Continuous wipe, fast speed.



OFF: System off.

MIST: Misting function.



Misting function

To operate the windscreen wipersonce in case of light rain or mist,lightly press the windscreen wiper/washer lever down and release it.

The lever will return automatically toits normal position when released.

The wipers will operate through onecycle.

{ Caution

Less than clear vision for thedriver can lead to an accidentresulting in personal injury anddamage to your vehicle or otherproperty.

Do not operate the windscreenwipers when the windscreen isdry or obstructed, as with snow orice. Using the wipers on anobstructed windscreen candamage the wiper blades, wipermotor, and glass.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Check blades are not frozen towindows before operating in coldweather. Wiper operation whileblade is frozen can damage wipermotor.

Automatic wipers with rainsensor

The rain sensor detects the amountof water on the windscreen andautomatically regulates thewindscreen wipers.

To operate the windscreen wipersautomatically, move the windscreenwiper/ washer lever toward theAUTO position.

The sensitivity of the system can beadjusted by turning the band of thewindscreen wiper/washer lever upor down.

To turn the system off, move thewindscreen wiper/washer levertoward the OFF position.

{ Caution

Do not switch on the windscreenwipers or set them to automaticoperation with rain sensor in carwashes. This could damage thewiper blades or wiper system.



The windscreen wipers operateonce to check the system when theignition switch is turned to ACCwhile the wiper lever is in the AUTOposition.

So as to ensure proper operation ofthe rain sensor, the sensor fieldmust be free from dust and dirt.Vehicles with rain sensor can beidentified by the sensor field nearthe top of the windscreen.

The wipers are not operated whenselect lever of automatic transaxle isin "N" position and vehicle speed islower than 5 km/h.

windscreen washer

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayedonto the windscreen and the wiperswipes for one stroke.

{ Caution

Do not operate the windscreenwasher continuously for morethan some seconds, or when thewasher fluid tank is empty. Thiscan cause the washer motor tooverheat resulting in costlyrepairs.

{ Warning

Do not spray washer fluid on thewindscreen in freezing weather.

Using washer fluid and wipersmay cause an accident infreezing weather because washerfluid can form ice on a frozenwindscreen and obstruct yourvision.



Rear Window Wiper/Washer

Wiper

To operate the tailgate wiper, turnthe ignition ACC or ON and rotatethe end of the windscreen wiper/washer lever upward.

The tailgate wiper operates in thefollowing three positions:

OFF : System off. Default position.

INT : Intermittent operation.

LO : Continuous wipe, slow speed.

Washer

To spray washer fluid on the tailgatewindow, press the button at the endof the lever until the washers begin.When you release the button, thewashers will stop, but the wipers willcontinue to wipe about three times.

{ Caution

Less than clear vision for thedriver can lead to an accidentresulting in personal injury anddamage to your vehicle or otherproperty.

Do not operate the tailgatewindow wiper when the tailgatewindow is dry or obstructed, aswith snow or ice.

Using the wiper on an obstructedwindow can damage the wiperblades, wiper motor, and glass.

Check blade is not frozen towindow before operating in coldweather. Wiper operation whileblade is frozen can damage wipermotor.

Do not spray washer fluid on thetailgate window in freezingweather.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

Warm the tailgate window beforeyou operate the tailgate windowwasher.

Washer fluid can form ice on afrozen tailgate window andobstruct your vision.

Do not operate the tailgatewindow washer continuously formore than some seconds,or when the washer fluid tank isempty. This can cause the washermotor to overheat resulting incostly repairs.

Rear smart wiper

To achieve a clear vision in the rain,the rear wiper will operateautomatically when you selectreverse gear while the front wiper isoperating.

Headlamp Washer

Your vehicle may have headlampwashers.

The headlamp washers clear debrisfrom the headlamp lenses.

To wash the headlamps, press thewasher button located on the leftside of the instrument panel whenthe headlamps are turned on.Washer fluid is sprayed onto theheadlamps. Then the headlampwasher system is disabled for about2 minutes. If washer fluid level is

low, the washer system cannot beoperated for about 4 minutes afterspraying.

Clock

When the ignition is ACC or ON, thedigital clock displays the time. Thedigital clock has three adjustingbuttons.

H: Hour button.

To advance 1 hour, press the Hbutton.



To advance more than 1 hour, pressand hold the H button until youreach the correct hour.

M: Minute button.

To advance 1 minute, press the Mbutton.

To advance more than 1 minute,press and hold the M button untilyou reach the correct minute.

S : Set button.

To reset the time to the nearesthour, press the S button.

If you press this button when thetime is between 8:00 and 8:29 forexample, the display will resetto 8:00.

If you press this button while thetime is between 8:30 and 8:59 forexample, the display will resetto 9:00.

Note: Remember to reset yourvehicle's clock each time youdisconnect and then reconnect thebattery or replace a fuse.

Power Sockets A 12V power outlet is located infront of centre console, below thebackward of centre console and onthe left side of luggagecompartment.

Do not exceed the maximum powerconsumption of 120 watts.

With ignition off the power outlet isdeactivated.

Additionally the power outlet isdeactivated in case of low batteryvoltage.

{ Caution

Do not connect any currentdelivering accessories, e.g.electrical charging devices orbatteries.

Do not damage the sockets byusing unsuitable plugs.



Warning Lights

Speedometer

Type 1

Type 2

Indicates vehicle speed.

Mileometer

Type 1

The odometer shows how far yourcar has been driven in kilometres ormiles.

There are independent tripodometer, which measure thedistance your vehicle has travelledsince you last reset this function.

To reset each trip meter to zero,press and hold the trip odometerbutton until it resets. The tripodometer button is located in thelower right area of the speedometer.



The odometer, trip A and trip B canbe switched by pressing the tripodometer button.

Type 2 If your vehicle has a DIC in themiddle of the cluster, the odometer,trip A, trip B and the personalisationsetting (language or keylesslocking) display in the DIC.

The odometer, trip A, trip B can beswitched by pressing the buttonlocated in the lower left area of thespeedometer.

On the odometer display, press andhold the button to enter thepersonalisation setting menu.

You can select the following order.



Each menu can be switched bypressing the button shortly.. Language. Keyless Locking Change. Feature Settings Exit

Note: The vehicle should be instationary condition with the selectlever in P.

Language

Press the button a few secondswhen language displays.

Press the button shortly, until thelanguage is displayed to the desiredlanguage.

To select, press the button a fewseconds.

Keyless Locking Change

Press the button a few secondswhen Keyless Locking Changedisplays.

Each time you press the buttonshortly, the mode changes in thefollowing order:

Off → On → No change → Off..

To select, press the button a fewseconds.

Feature Settings Exit

Press the button a few secondswhen Feature Settings Exit displaysto return the odometer.



Rev Counter

<Petrol>

Type 1

Type 2

<Diesel>

Type 1

Type 2

Displays the engine revolutions perminute.

Drive in a low engine speed rangefor each gear as much as possible.

{ Caution

If the needle is in the warningzone, the maximum permittedengine speed is exceeded.Engine is at risk.



Fuel Gauge

Type 1

Type 2

Displays the fuel level in the tank.

Never run the tank dry.

Because of the fuel remaining in thetank, the top-up quantity may beless than the specified tankcapacity.

Movement of the fuel within the fueltank causes the fuel gauge pointerto move when you brake, accelerateor turn.

{ Danger

Before refuelling, stop vehicle andswitch off the engine.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

It indicates engine coolanttemperature when the ignitionswitch is ON.



{ Caution

Do not continue to drive yourvehicle if the temperature gaugeneedle is in the red area of thegauge. This means your vehicle'sengine is overheating.

Driving with an overheated enginecan damage your vehicle.

Service Display

Control indicators

The control indicators described arenot present in all vehicles. Thedescription applies to all instrumentversions. The actual in the vehiclemay differ from the description.When the ignition is switched on,most control indicators willilluminate briefly as afunctionality test.



Control indicators in the instrument cluster



Transmission Display

Type 1

It indicates the selected gear ortransmission mode.

Type 2

If your vehicle has a DIC in themiddle of the cluster, the selectedgear or transmission mode displaywill be shown on the bottom ofthe DIC.

IndicatorG illuminates or flashes green.

Flashes

The control indicator flashes if anindicator or the hazard lights areactivated.

If the green arrows don't flash whenyou signal a turn or push the hazardwarning button, check the fuse andreplace any that are not operatingproperly.

See Bulb Replacement onpage 10-25

See Fuses on page 10-29

See Indicator Signals on page 6-5

Seat Belt Reminders> for driver's seat illuminates orflashes.



Passenger's seat belt reminderindicator is located above theglove box.

C for front passenger seatilluminates or flashes, when seat isoccupied.

When the ignition switched ON, theindicator light and warning chimecomes on and stay for severalseconds to remind fasten seat belts.

The light flashes until the seat beltis buckled.

If seat belt remains unbuckled whenthe vehicle is moving, lights andchime repeat.

If the seat belt is buckled, light andchime will go off.

See Three-Point Seat belt onpage 3-14

Airbag and Safety BeltTensioner Light9 illuminates.

When the ignition is switched on,the control indicator illuminates forabout few seconds. If it does notilluminate, does not go out after fewseconds or illuminates whilstdriving, there is a fault in the belttensioner or in the airbag system.The systems may fail to trigger inthe event of an accident.

Vehicle trouble or deployment of thebelt tensioners or airbags may beindicated by continuous illuminationof 9

{ Warning

Have the cause of the faulteliminated immediately by arepairer.

See Airbag System on page 3-16

See "Belt tensioners" under Seatbelts on page 3-12

Airbag On-Off Light

The control indicator is locatedabove the glove box.

c for front passenger airbagilluminates.

When the control indicatorilluminates the front passengerairbag is deactivated.



Charging System Light" illuminates.

It illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and goes out shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunning

Stop, switch off engine. Battery isnot charging. Engine cooling maybe interrupted.

Seek the assistance of a repairer.

MalfunctionIndicator Lamp* illuminates.


{ Caution

The indicator light signals thatyour vehicle has a problem thatrequires attention. Driving with themalfunction indicator light on candamage the emissions controlsystem and can affect the fueleconomy and drive ability of yourvehicle.

Consult a repairer to repair theproblem as soon as possible.

The Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) will illuminate if a fault existsin the emission related componentsor related sub systems.

It will stay on as long as the EngineControl Module (ECM) detects thefault. If a severe misfire level isdetected, the MIL will flashcontinuously. Severe misfire cancause catalytic converter damage.

The Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) will also illuminate to indicatethat there is a malfunction in the

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF).If this happens, you should consulta repairer to repair the problemimmediately.

See Diesel Fuel Filter onpage 10-24

Your vehicle's electronic system willswitch to an emergency runningprogrammer so you may continue todrive. However, you should consulta repairer to repair the problem assoon as possible.

If the MIL comes on briefly and thengoes out again, this is normal anddoes not indicate a system fault.

Service Vehicle SoonLightB illuminates when the vehicleneeds a service.

Have the vehicle checked by arepairer immediately.



Brake System WarningLight$ illuminates.

When the parking brake is releasedthe brake system warning light willremain illuminated if the brake fluidlevel is too low or if there is a brakesystem fault.

See Brake Fluid on page 10-21

{ Warning

Do not drive with the brakesystem warning lamp on.

This may mean your brakes arenot working properly.

Driving with malfunctioningbrakes can lead to a collisionresulting in personal injuries anddamage to your vehicle and otherproperty.

Electric parking brake light

Parking brake status light

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), the parkingbrake status lightY comes onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by an authorised repairer.

The parking brake status lightYcomes on when the parking brake isapplied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased or while driving, there is aproblem with the Electric ParkingBrake system.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, consult anauthorised repairer.

Parking brake warning light

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), the parkingbrake warning light

should come on briefly when thevehicle is in ON/ START. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn if there is aproblem.

If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible.

For vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB),# comes onwhen the EPB switch is releasedwithout pressing the brake pedal.Always press the brake pedalbefore pressing the EPB switch torelease the Electric Parking Brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9-18



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light! illuminates.

Illuminates for a few seconds afterthe ignition is switched on. Thesystem is ready for operation whenthe control indicator goes out.

If the control indicator does not goout after a few seconds, or if itilluminates while driving, there is afault in the ABS. The brake systemremains operational but without ABSregulation.

See Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9-17.

All-Wheel-Drive LightC illuminates when the ignition isON and goes out after about a fewseconds.

This light flashes when AWD systemis temporarily disabled andilluminates to indicate that there is amalfunction in the AWD system.

If AWD system warning light comeson, you should consult a repairer torepair the problem as soon aspossible.

See All-Wheel Drive on page 9-15

Descent Control SystemLight5 illuminates.

Active and not ready/warninglight

The green DCS light is DCS activeindicator and the amber DCS light isDCS not ready & warning light.

DCS active indicator illuminates(asgreen colour) when DCS is readyfor use and flashes(as green colour)while DCS is operating by pressingthe DCS button located on thecentre of the instrument panel.

DCS not ready & warning lightworks as the following:. Flashes (as amber colour) to

indicate that DCS is not readyfor condition to operate due to

the high temperature (about350~400°C) of friction material(front pad) through severe orrepeated braking. This light willdisappear when the temperatureof friction material (front pad) islower than 350°C.

. Illuminates (as amber colour) toindicate that there is amalfunction in the system due tothe high temperature (over 400°C) of friction material (front pad)through severe or repeatedbraking.

. This light also will disappearwhen temperature of frictionmaterial (front pad) is lower than350°C.

. The flashing and illuminating ofDCS not ready & warning lightnotify you that the frictionmaterial needs to cooldown(drive your vehicle enoughwithout braking as much aspossible). Above temperaturemay differ somewhat according



to vehicle condition orenvironment (season or outertemperature) or etc.

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLightE illuminates.


If the indicator does not go out aftera few seconds, or if it illuminateswhile driving, there is a fault in thepower steering.

Seek the assistance of a repairer.

Ultrasonic ParkingSensor LightX illuminates.. Fault due to sensors that are

dirty. Covered by ice or snow

. Outside ultrasonic wavesinterference

The source of interference isremoved, the system will operatenormally.

If the lamp does not go out, youhave the cause of the fault in thesystem remedied by a repairer.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) IndicatorLightd illuminates or flashes.

This lamp flashes while ESC isoperating and illuminates to indicatethat there is a malfunction in thesystem.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Lightg illuminates or flashes.

Illuminates when the system isdeactivated.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightC illuminates.

This lamp tells you that the enginecoolant has overheated.

If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and let theengine idle for a few minutes.

If the lamp does not go out, youshould turn the engine off andconsult a repairer as soon aspossible. We recommend that youconsult an authorised repairer.

Pre-Heat LightK illuminates.

Illuminates when preheating isactivated. When the light goes outthe engine can be started.



Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem Light7 illuminates yellow.


If the light comes on while driving,the tyre pressure monitoring systemhas detected that one or more ofyour tyres is significantlyunder-inflated.

Stop the vehicle in safety place,check tyres and inflate the tyres tothe recommended pressure on thetyre inflation pressure label.

When the system detects amalfunction, the light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle.

The malfunction light comes on untilthe problem is corrected. Have thevehicle checked by a repairer.

Diesel Particulate FilterLightL flashes. (Diesel only)

Flashes and a chime sounds if thediesel particle filter requirescleaning and previous drivingconditions did not permit automaticcleaning.

It goes off when the self cleaningoperation is complete.

See Diesel Particulate Filter onpage 9-7

Engine Oil Pressure Light: illuminates.


Illuminates when the engine isrunning

{ Caution

Engine lubrication may beinterrupted. This may result indamage to the engine and/orlocking of the drive wheels.

If the engine oil pressure warninglamp comes on while driving, pull offthe road, stop the engine and checkthe oil level.

{ Warning

When the engine is off,considerably more force isneeded to brake and steer.

Do not remove the key untilvehicle has come to a standstill,otherwise the steering columnlock could engage unexpectedly.



Check oil level before seeking theassistance of a repairer.

See Engine Oil on page 10-11

Low Engine Oil LevelLightL illuminates when the ignition isON and goes out after a fewseconds.

This light illuminates when engineoil level is too low.

If engine oil level warning lightcomes on, check engine oil leveland top up if necessary.


Change Engine Oil Light7 illuminates when the ignition isON and goes out after a fewseconds.

Your vehicle may have an engine oillife system that lets you know whento change the engine oil.

When the change engine oil lightcomes on, it means that the engineoil needs to be changed.

Once the engine oil has beenchanged, the engine oil life systemmust be reset. After reset, thechange engine oil light will go out.


Fuel Economy LightFor vehicles with the eco (fueleconomy mode) light, it comes onwhen the eco (economy) switch,located on the centre console nearthe gear lever, is pressed. Press theswitch again to turn off the light andexit the fuel saver mode.

For vehicles with petrol engine, theeco light will turn off when you movegear lever to manual mode.

Low Fuel Warning Light. illuminates.

Illuminates when level in fuel tank istoo low.

{ Caution

Do not let your vehicle run outof fuel.

This can damage the catalyticconverter.

See Catalytic Converter onpage 9-8

Water in Fuel WarningLight

It illuminates (diesel only) when thewater level in the fuel filter exceedsa certain level.

Immediately drain the water fromfuel filter.



The warning lamp will go off whendraining is completed.

See Diesel Fuel Filter onpage 10-24

Security LightIf your vehicle has additionalanti-theft system related toThatcham insurance, the anti-theftoff indicatoro illuminates toindicate that you have disabled theintrusion and inclination sensor bypressing the button located on theheadlining. If you press the buttonagain, the indicator will go out.

See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2-11

Immobiliser LightA illuminates.

Illuminates when fault in theimmobiliser system. The enginecannot be started.

Have the cause of the faultremedied by a repairer.

Reduced Engine PowerLightw illuminates.

It illuminates with the service vehiclesoon light when the vehicle needs aservice.

Pull off the road, stop the engineand restart after 10 seconds.

The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed.

Have the vehicle checked by arepairer immediately.

Apply Foot brake Light0 illuminates.

It illuminates when the EPB switchis released without pressing thebrake pedal. Always press the brakepedal before pressing the EPBswitch to release the ElectricParking Brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9-18

Also, it illuminates when the clutchpedal needs to be operated torestart the engine.

See Automatic Engine Start/StopFeature on page 9-4

Main-Beam On Light3 illuminates.

See Headlamp Main/Dipped-BeamChanger on page 6-3

Front Fog Lamp Light

.# illuminates.

Illuminated when the front fog lampsare on.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6-5

Rear Fog Lamp Lights illuminates.

Illuminated when the rear fog lampsare on.

See Rear Fog Lamps on page 6-6



Tail lamp Indicator Light; illuminates.

Illuminated when the tail lampsare on.

Cruise Control LightJ illuminates when the cruisecontrol systems are on.

It will go out when the cruise controlsystem is turned off.

Trailer Indicator Light

Illuminates when the trailer isconnected to your vehicle. It will goout when the trailer is disconnected.

Bonnet Ajar LightIt illuminates when the bonnetis open.

See Automatic Engine Start/StopFeature on page 9-4

Door Ajar Light

Illuminates.

It illuminates when a door is open.

Tailgate ajar light

m illuminates when the tailgate isopen or not securely latched.



Information Displays

Driver Information Centre (DIC)



1. FATC (Fully AutomaticTemperature Control) displaypanel

2. Outside temperature

3. Trip computer

4. Compass

5. Dual zone

The DIC is the Driver InformationCentre that displays the tripcomputer, display panel forautomatic temperature control,outside temperature, compassinformation and dual zone whenignition switch is ON.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DIC (inthe middle of the cluster) indicatethe status of the vehicle or someaction that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

Brake System Messages

Press Brake To Start Engine

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if you try to start the enginewithout having the brake pressed.

Press Clutch To Start Engine

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if you try to start the enginewithout having the clutch pressed.

Key and Lock Messages

Accessory Mode Active

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when the accessory modeis active.

Electronic Key Not Detected

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if the vehicle does notdetect the presence of a transmitterwhen you have attempted to startthe vehicle or a vehicle door hasjust closed.

Electronic key Not DetectedRestart Allowed

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when the keyless accesstransmitter is not detected inside thevehicle while you are trying to turnthe ignition off.



Rotate Control To Off Position

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays as a reminder to turn theignition off.

Service Keyless Start System

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays when there is a problemwith this feature.

Transmission Messages

Shift To Park

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this messagedisplays if the vehicle is not inP (Park) while the engine is beingturned off.

Trip ComputerTrip computer provides the driverwith driving information such asdriving distance for remaining fuel,average fuel consumption, averagespeed and driving time.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display changes in thefollowing order:

Driving distance for remaining fuel→ Average speed → Driving time →Average fuel consumption →Driving distance for remaining fuel.

To reset average speed or drivingtime or average fuel consumption,press the MODE button for morethan 2 seconds.

To change the distance unit, do thefollowing:

1. Press the SET button for morethan 2 seconds. Thetemperature unit will flash.

2. Press the SET button again. Thedistance unit will flash.

3. Press the Q or R button tochange the distance unit (km↔ mile).

Driving distance for remaining fuel

This mode indicates the estimateddriving distance to empty from thecurrent fuel in the fuel tank.

When the distance to empty is lessthan 50 km (30 miles), — willdisplay.



Note: The driving distance forremaining fuel can differ from theactual distance according to drivingconditions, driving pattern or vehiclespeed.

Average speed

This mode indicates the averagespeed. To reset the average speedto zero, press the MODE button formore than 2 seconds.

Driving time

This mode indicates the total drivingtime. To reset the driving time tozero, press the MODE button formore than 2 seconds. The drivingtime will be initialised to 0:00 afterbeing displayed to 99:59.

Average Fuel Consumption

This mode indicates the vehicle'saverage fuel consumption.

Note: Average fuel consumption isreset to 10.0 if the battery isdisconnected.

To reset the average fuelconsumption to zero, press theMODE button for more than2 seconds.

Note: The average fuelconsumption can differ from theactual average fuel consumptionaccording to driving conditions.



The average fuel consumption canaccording to the driving conditions,driving pattern or vehicle speed.

Compass

This displays the vehicle's drivingdirection to 8-direction (N, NE, E,SE, S, SW, W, NW).

Note: Whenever the DIC or thebattery is disconnected, the DICmust be recalibrated. To do this, thevehicle must be driven through360°. Until calibrated the compasswill not function correctly.

1. If you press the MODE and SETbutton simultaneously for morethan 2 seconds, the compassdisplay flashes.

2. Turn the vehicle around 1complete circle within90 seconds slowly, then thecalibration will be accomplished.

3. When the calibration is finished,the compass display does notflash anymore. You can turnaround to any direction, left orright.

If enough space is not availableto turn around 1 circle, turn thevehicle around as shown in thebelow figure.

Release conditions for thecompass calibration. Press the SET button twice

continuously.. When the vehicle is not turned

within 90 seconds aftercalibration mode started.

Note: The direction will bedisplayed while driving.

If the compass display continues toflash, turn around again slowly untilit goes off.



Note: In the compass calibrationmode, press the SET button tomove to deflection calibration mode.At that time, press Q or R button toadjust deflection calibration value.

{ Caution

If there are mobile telephones ormagnetic bodies around the DIC,the compass may not be operatedproperly.

Fatc display panel/outsidetemperature

See Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-6


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Automatic Light Control . . . . . . . 6-2Headlamp Main/Dipped-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Headlamp RangeAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reversing Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Misted Lamp Covers . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

To turn the head, tail and parkinglamps on or off, twist the end of thecombination switch lever.

The light switch has three positionswhich activate various lampfunctions as follows:

OFF: All the lights are off.

; : The parking lamps, tail lamps,number plate lamps, and instrumentpanel lamps are illuminated.

5 3 : The dipped beamheadlamps and all of the abovelamps are illuminated.


6-2 Lighting

Automatic Light Control

The light switch with automatic lampcontrol has four positions whichactivate various lamp functions asfollows:

P : All the lights are off.

All lamps are off and return knob toits original AUTO position.

AUTO: Turn the lamps on or offautomatically to illuminate in theposition; or2 3 by sensinghow dark it is outside. (Defaultposition)

; : The parking lamps, tail lamps,number plate lamps, and instrumentpanel lamps are illuminated.

2 3 : The dipped beamheadlamps and the lamps to comeon in the position; areilluminated.

To turn the automatic lamp controloff, turn the light switch lever to theOFF position. The lever will returnautomatically to its normal originalwhen released.

To turn the automatic lamp controlon, turn the light switch lever to theOFF position again.

{ Caution

In order for this feature to workproperly, do not place stickers orother items over the sunlightsensor located in front of thewindscreen defroster vents. Doingso could cause the sensor tomalfunction.

{ Caution

If you open a driver's door orwhen you press UNLOCK buttonon the remote keyless entrytransmitter, instrument panellamps will come on automaticallyand stay on for about 30 seconds.

Lamps on reminder

If you open the driver's door with theignition off and the light switch in theposition; or2 3 you will heara warning chime. But when you turnthe lamps on again after turningthem off while warning chimesounds, you will not hear a warningchime.

Door-to-door light function

The door-to-door light functionprovides a period of exterior lightingas you leave the area around yourvehicle when it is dark enoughoutside. The feature is activatedwhen the exterior lamps are on due


Lighting 6-3

to the automatic lamp controlfeature, and when the ignition isturned off.

Approaching light

The feature is activated when thelight switch is in the AUTO positionand when it is dark enough outside.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton on the remote keyless entryto get in your vehicle, hazard lampsflash twice and the exterior lampsilluminate automatically for about20 seconds.

Wiper activated lighting

The feature is activated when thelight switch is in the AUTO position.

If the windscreen wipers continue tooperate 8 cycles, the exterior lampswill illuminate automatically.

Headlamp Main/Dipped-Beam Changer

To turn the main beam headlampson, make sure the dipped beamheadlamps are on.

Push the combination switch levertoward the instrument panel.

The headlamp main beam indicatorilluminates when headlamps are onmain beam.

To switch from main beamheadlamps to dipped beam, pull thecombination switch lever backtoward you, to its normal position.

{ Caution

Always switch the main beamheadlamps to dipped beam whenyou approach on coming vehiclesor when other vehicles are ahead.

Main beam headlamps cantemporarily blind other drivers,which could result in a collision.


6-4 Lighting

Flash-to-Pass

To flash the main beam headlamps,pull the combination switch levertoward you and release it. The leverwill return to its normal positionwhen you release it.

The main beam headlamps will stayon as long as you hold thecombination switch levertoward you.

Headlamp RangeAdjustment

Manual headlamp rangeadjustment

To adapt headlamp range to thevehicle load to prevent dazzling turnknob to required position.

0 = front seats occupied

1 = all seats occupied

2 = all seats occupied and loadcompartment laden.

3 = driver's seat occupied and loadcompartment laden.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime running light increasesvisibility of the vehicle in thedaytime.

Tail lamps are not on.

Hazard Lights

Operated with the| button.


Lighting 6-5

To activate the hazard lights, pushthe button.

To turn off the hazard lights, pushthe button again.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

lever up = right indicator

lever down = left indicator

If the lever is moved past theresistance point, the indicator isswitched on constantly. When the

steering wheel moves back, theindicator is automaticallydeactivated.

For three flashes, e.g. whenchanging lanes, press the lever untilresistance is felt and then release.

Move the lever to the resistancepoint and hold for longer indication.

Switch the indicator off manually bymoving the lever to its originalposition.

Front Fog Lamps

Fog lamps provide:

Extra illumination to the sides of theroad ahead.

Improved visibility in fog or snow.

To turn the fog lamps on:

Make sure the light switch is inthe; or5 3 position.

Rotate the ring on the middle of thelight switch lever to #. The ring willreturn automatically to its normalposition when released.

The front fog lamp indicator in theinstrument panel illuminates whenthe fog lamps are turned on.

To turn the fog lamps off, rotate thering to; position again. The frontfog lamp indicator will go off.

If your vehicle has the automaticlamp control, parking lamps anddipped beam headlamps will comeon simultaneously when turning onthe front fog lamps.


6-6 Lighting

Rear Fog Lamps

To turn the rear fog lamps on, rotatethe ring on the middle of the lightswitch lever to s when the dippedbeam headlamps are on, or whenthe parking lamps and the front foglamps are on. The ring will returnautomatically to its normal positionwhen released.

The rear fog lamp indicator in theinstrument panel illuminates whenthe fog lamps are turned on.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn thering to s position again. The rearfog lamp indicator will go off.

If your vehicle has the automaticlamp control, parking lamps anddipped beam headlamps will comeon simultaneously when turning onthe rear fog lamps.

Reversing LampsThe reversing lamp come on whenthe ignition is on and reverse gear isselected.

Misted Lamp CoversThe inside of the light housing maymist up briefly in poor, wet and coldweather conditions, in heavy rain orafter washing. The mist disappearsquickly by itself; to help switch onthe headlamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The dimmer switch controls thebrightness of the instrument panellamps.

To dim the panel illumination, pushthe button and turn it clockwise.

To brighten the illumination, pushthe button and turn it anti-clockwise.


Lighting 6-7

Dome Lamps

Press the button to turn on theinterior lights.

Press the button again to turn thelamps off.

Centre/rear interior lights come onwhen you open a door or tailgate.If you continue to open a door ortailgate, the lamps will stay on forabout 10 minutes. If all doors andtailgate are closed, the lamps dimgradually after about 10 secondsinstead of immediately turning off.

Reading Lamps

Push the button to illuminate thefront map light.

Push again to turn off the light.

You can deactivate interior lights(when the button is not pressed),front door step lamps and key holelamp by pressing the button.

Note: The battery can bedischarged if the lights are turnedon for a long time.


6-8 Lighting

{ Warning

Avoid using the courtesy lightwhile driving in the dark.

A lit passenger compartmentreduces visibility in the dark, andcould cause a collision.

Lighting Features

Entry Lighting

Welcome lighting

Some lights are switched on for ashort time when unlocking thevehicle with the remote control. Thisfunction facilitates locating thevehicle when it is dark.

The lighting switches offimmediately when the ignition isturned to the accessory position.

Front door step lamp

Front door step lamps come onwhen you open a door. If youcontinue to open a door, the lampswill stay on for about 10 minutes.If all doors are closed, the lampstays on for about 10 seconds andthen goes out.

Front door step lamps can beimmediately turned off by pushingthe button located on the headlining.


Lighting 6-9

Ambient Lighting

If your vehicle has this feature,ambient lighting illuminates on frontdoor sill plates, underneath frontand rear seats when headlamps areon at night.

Battery Power ProtectionYour vehicle has a feature to helpprevent you from draining thebattery in case you accidentallyleave on the headlamps, parkinglamps, or fog lamps, etc.

If you leave any of these lamps on,they will automatically turn off10 minutes after you turn theignition switch to the OFF position.

Battery rundown protection will notoperate when you turn the lamps on10 minutes after this featureoperated.


6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Data System (RDS) . . . 7-11

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

NavigationNavigation SystemOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42Using the NavigationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-88

IntroductionGeneral Information

The Infotainment system providesInfotainment in your car, using thelatest technology.

The infotainment system can beeasily used by registering up to 48(36 Preset + 12 Auto Store) FM orAM stations with six Functionbuttons per every four pages.

The integrated CD player can playaudio CD and MP3 (WMA) discs,and the USB player (only for Type 2optional) can play connected USBstorage devices or iPod products.

Connect a portable music player tothe exterior sound input to andenjoy the rich sound of theInfotainment system.

The Bluetooth phone connectionfunction allows for the use ofwireless hands-free phone calls, aswell as a phone music player.


7-2 Infotainment System

The digital sound processorprovides a number of presetequaliser modes for soundoptimisation.

The system can be easily adjustedusing the carefully designedadjusting device, smart display, andmultifunctional menu dial regulator.. The "Overview" section provides

a simple overview ofInfotainment system's functionsand summary of all regulatorydevices.

. The "Operation" section explainsthe basic controls for theInfotainment system.



Overview

Type 1: Radio + CD/MP3 + Bluetooth



Type 2: Radio/DAB + CD/MP3 + Bluetooth + USB/iPod + Optional A-NAVI



Type 3: Radio + CD/MP3 Changer + Bluetooth



1. Display

Display for Play/Reception/Menustate and information.

2. Disc slot

This is the slot in which compactdiscs are inserted or ejected.

3. DIRECTORY [DIR] button (onlyfor Type 1/2)

Select directory unit/Alltrack unit.

LOAD button (only for Type 3)

Use this button to insert a discinto the infotainment system.

4. t SEEKu buttons

Radio mode. Press: To search for the

next/ previous receivablehigher/lower station.

. Down hold: To useAutomatic store.

CD/MP3 or Optional USB/iPod mode

. To search for the next/previous media library

5. Function buttons

To select the functions indicatedin the display.

6. EJECT button

Press this button and take outthe disc.

7. r TUNE[. In the radio mode, selects

the radio station (tuningdownward/upward)

. In the CD/MP3 or OptionalUSB/iPod mode, used toplay previous/next track orfast search backwardthrough the tracks beingplayed.

8. BAND button

Press button to select FM/AMradio band or DAB (only forType 2).

9. FAVOURITE [FAV] button

Switches between presetchannel pages.

10. MENU/SOUND button. Press

‐ In FM radio or DAB(Digital AudioBroadcasting: onlyfor Type 2) mode:To use RDS Menuor DAB Menu.

‐ In iPod mode: Touse the Ipod medialibrary function (onlyfor Type 2 optional)

. Down hold: Press toselect the tone, front/backand left/right volumedistribution modes.

11. POWER [P ] button withVOLUME dial



When the power is ON:. Press: Switches the mute

function ON and OFF.. Down hold: Turns the

unit's power OFF.. Turn the dial to Volume

adjustment and toneadjustment in the tonecontrol mode.

When the power is OFF:. Pressing the power

button turns thepower ON.

12. BLUETOOTH [4 ]

To select the BLUETOOTHfunctions indicated in thedisplay.

13. TP/INFORMATION [INFO]button. Press: Traffic

announcement receptionsetting.

. Down hold: Shows thenecessary information foroperations in each modeand function, programmesbeing broadcast, and disc/external deviceinformation.

14. AUX port

Connect an exterior sounddevice to this port.

15. SOURCE [SRC]/PAUSE button(only for Type 2)

Press to select CD/MP3, USB/iPod or AUX audio function.

CD/AUX button (only for Type1/3)

Press to select CD/MP3 orconnected AUX function.

Steering wheel remote control



1. Volume [+/-] buttons. Press the button to

increase/decrease thevolume step.

. Hold down the button morethan 1 second to quicklyincrease/decrease thevolume level.

2. MODE button

Press the button to select Radio,AUX or CD/MP3/USB/iPod/Bluetooth audio function.

3. SEEK button. Press the button to change

the registered radio stationsor music track beingplayed.

. Hold down the button morethan 1 second to quicklyseek up the frequency orforward through thecurrently playing songs.

4. POWER MUTE button. Press the button in standby

mode to turn theinfotainment system on.

. Press the button in anymusic play mode to turn themute function on/off.

. Hold down the button morethan 1 second to turn theinfotainment system off.

5. CALL button. Press the button in standby

mode to make a call oranswer the incoming call.

. Press the button twice todial for last call number.

. Hold down the button morethan 1 second to cancel orhang-up the call.

Operation

Buttons and controlling device

The Infotainment system is operatedby using the function buttons,multifunctional dial, and the menuindicated on the screen display.

The buttons and control devicesused in the system are as follows.. The Infotainment system

buttons and dial. Steering wheel audio remote

control buttons

System on/off

Press the POWER [P ] button toturn the power on.. Turning on the power will play

the previously chosenbroadcasting station or song.

Hold down the POWER [P ] buttonmore than 1 second to turn thepower off.



Volume control

Turn the VOLUME dial to adjust thevolume.. Using the steering wheel audio

remote control, press theVolume [+/-] buttons to adjustthe volume.

. The current sound volume isindicated.

. Turning on the Infotainmentsystem power will set thevolume level to its previousselection (when it is less thanthe maximum starting volume).

Audio Mute

Press the POWER [P ] button toaudio mute when the power is on.

Tone settings

Hold down the MENU/SOUNDbutton to display Tone setting menu.

Press the Function button under"Tone settings menu" to selectdesired control mode.

Turn the VOLUME dial to select thedesired tone control value.

Tone Settings menu. Bass: Adjust the bass level from

−12 to +12.. Midrange [Mid]: Adjust the

midrange level from -12 to +12.. Treble [Treb]: Adjust the treble

level from -12 to +12.. Balance [Bal]: Adjust the left/

right speaker balance from left15 to right 15.

. Fader [Fad]: Adjust the front/rear speaker balance from front15 to rear 15 in the six speakersystem model.

. Preset Equaliser [P EQ]: Selecta sound style (Pop/Rock/Country/Voice/Jazz/ Classic)

. To cancel the selected PresetEQ, press the Function buttonunder P EQ once more withsame procedure.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Mode Selection

Press the BAND button to listen tothe FM/AM radio and DAB (only forType 2) from other mode.

Band Change

The band changes from AM to FM,FM to AM or FM to DAB, DAB toAM (only for Type 2) every timeBAND button pressed.

Manual Tune Up/Down

Pressr TUNE[ buttons tochange frequency up/down.

The frequency increases ordecreases 1 step every timerTUNE[ buttons pressed.

Seek Up/Down

Pressr TUNE[ buttons to findnext/previous station automatically.



Favourite preset memory

It has 6 favourite pages and storeup to 36 stations regardless of AM/FM band and DAB (only for Type 2).

It can store a station by thefollowing procedure

1. Seek station or tune manuallythe station you want.

2. Select the favourite page bypressing the FAVOURITE [FAV]button.

3. Hold down a Function buttonmore than 1 second under thenumber where you store thisstation.

By above procedure, the 36 stationsare stored in the favourite presetmemory.

Recall favourite preset

You can listen to the station storedin the favourite preset by thefollowing procedure.

1. Select the favourite page bypressing the FAVOURITE [FAV]button.

2. Press the Function button underthe Favourite preset numberwhich the station you want tolisten is stored.

Auto-store

Hold down thet SEEKu button,the radio will start auto-storeoperation and store 12 stationsautomatically.

DAB Service componentSearch (only for Type 2)

Press ther TUNE[ buttons toseek for available DAB servicecomponent in current ensemble.

To skip to the previous/nextensemble, press thet SEEKubuttons.

DAB Ensemble Search (onlyfor Type 2)

Hold down thet SEEKu buttonsto automatically seek for availableDAB service component with goodreception.

Linking the DAB Service (onlyfor Type 2)

When you setup the Auto linkingDAB-FM is activated, if the DABservice signal is weak, theinfotainment system received thelinked service componentautomatically. (refer to DAB Menu→ → select the desired Link mode)

Tuning a DAB station manually(only for Type 2)

From the DAB mode, press theMENU button.

In the DAB Menu display, press theFunction button under TUNE.

Turn ther TUNE[ buttons tomanually find the desiredbroadcasting frequency.



Using the DAB Stations list

1. From the DAB mode, press theMENU button

2. In the DAB Menu display, pressthe LIST button.

3. In the Station Menu display,press the LIST button.

4. The Station list information willbe displayed.

5. You can search the Station liststhat are part of Function buttonunder TUNE.

6. Press the Function button underENT buttons to select thedesired list.

Showing the DAB information(only for Type 2)

Repeatedly long press INFO buttonto select the desired display modefor DAB station information.

DAB Category list

1. From the DAB mode, press theMENU button.


3. In the Station Menu display,press the CAT button.

4. The DAB category list will bedisplayed.

5. Turn the ←, → to select thedesired list, and then press theCategory button to receive therelevant broadcasting frequency.

6. You can search the Station liststhat are advantage ofrTUNE[ buttons.

7. Turn the ENT buttons to selectthe desired list.

DAB Update stations list (onlyfor Type 2)

1. From the DAB mode, press theMENU button.


3. In the Station Menu display,press the UPDATE button.

4. DAB broadcasting list updatewill proceed.

5. Turn the ←, → to select thedesired list, and then press theAnnouncement button to receivethe relevant broadcastingfrequency.

6. The announcement button willbe activated.

Radio Data System (RDS)

AF On/Off

AF function makes the radio trackthe best station all the time.

Press the MENU button in the radiomode, and then the radio displaysthe radio menu.

Press the Function button underRDS, and then the infotainmentsystem displays the RDS menu.

Press the Function button under AF.

The AF is enabled or disabledwhenever you press this functionbutton.



Regional On/Off

Regional function to make theinfotainment system jump toregional station (Regional off).

Press the MENU button in the radiomode, and then the infotainmentsystem displays the radio menu.

Press the Function button underRDS, and then the infotainmentsystem displays the RDS menu.

Press the Function buttonunder REG.

The regional options are enabled ordisabled whenever you press thisFunction button.

Traffic announcementreception

Press the TP button to listen to thetraffic announcement, theinfotainment system enables thetraffic announcement.

Press the TP button to cancel thetraffic announcement if theinfotainment system is in the trafficannouncement mode.

Traffic station seek

Press the TP button in the radiostation that hasn't the trafficannouncement, the infotainmentsystem searches the next stationthat has the traffic announcement.

Audio Players

CD PlayerOnce playback begins, the trackand track number will appear on thedisplay.

If the ignition or infotainment systemis turned off with a CD in the player,it will stay in the player. When a CDis in the player and the ignition isturned on, the infotainment systemmust be turned on before thecurrent CD will start playback. Whenthe ignition and infotainment systemare turned on, the CD will startplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

The CD player can play the smaller3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitymay be reduced due to CD-Rquality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been



recorded, and the way the CD-Rhas been handled. There may be anincrease in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty inloading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface ofthe CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, theCD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, seeCare of Your CDs for moreinformation.

If there is no apparent damage, try aknown good CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labelling the top of therecorded CD with a marking peninstead.

Notice: If you add any label to aCD, insert more than one CD intothe slot at a time, or attempt toplay scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player.

When using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error appears on the display,see "CD Messages" later in thissection.

CD playback mode selection

Press the SOURCE [SRC] (only forType 2) or CD (only for Type 1/3)button to play back the disc fromother mode.

Disc Load (only for Type 3)

This infotainment system can holdup to 6 discs.

1. Press the LOAD button, andthen the infotainment system willshow the number of emptydiscs.

2. Press the Function button underthe Disc Number you want toinsert.

3. Insert a CD into a CD slot withCD label up, then the radioinsert into the slot automaticallyand play back.

To insert multiple CDs, do thefollowing: (only for Type 3)

1. Hold down the LOAD button forone second. You will hear abeep and a message to loadmultiple discs will be displayed.

2. Follow the displayed instructionon when to insert the discs.

The CD player can take up to 6discs.

Note: Press the LOAD button againto cancel loading more CDs.

CD Eject

Press the EJECT button, and thenthe disc will be ejected from the trayfrom the infotainment system.

Pull the disc out of the tray.



Pause

Hold down the PAUSE (only forType 2) or CD (only for Type 1/3)button to pause playback while aCD is playing.

"PAUSE" will flash on the display.

Press and hold the PAUSE (only forType 2) or CD (only for Type 1/3)button again to start playing the CD.

If the infotainment system isconnected with AUX unit or USB/iPod device then pause functionwon't be enabled.

Next/Previous Track

Press ther TUNE[ buttons, thenthe infotainment system startsplayback of the next/previous track.

Next/Previous Folder

Press thet SEEKu buttons, andthen the infotainment system startsplayback of the next/previous folder.

Fast forward/Fast reverse

Press and hold ther TUNE[buttons, then the infotainmentsystem plays with fast forward/fastreverse.

RPT (Repeat)

Press the Function button underRPT, then the infotainment systemplays back the current track onrepeat.

To cancel this function, press theFunction button under RPT again.

RDM (Random)

Press the Function button underRDM, then the infotainment systemplays back a track randomly.

To cancel this function, press theFunction button under RDM again.

INT (Scan)

Press the Function button underINT, then the infotainment systemplays back the first few seconds ofall tracks sequentially.

To cancel this function, press theFunction button under INT again.

MP3

MP3/WMA Format

If you burn your own MP3/WMAdisc on a personal computer:. Make sure the MP3/WMA files

are recorded on a CD-R disc.. Do not mix standard audio and

MP3/WMA files on one disc.. Make sure each MP3/WMA file

has a .mp3 or .wma extension,other file extensions maynot work.

. Files can be recorded with avariety of fixed or variable bitrates. Song title, artist name,and album will be available fordisplay by the infotainmentsystem when recorded using ID3tags version 1 and 2.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organise songs by



albums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

. Make sure to finalise the discwhen burning an MP3/WMAdisc, using multiple sessions.It is usually better to burn thedisc all at once.

The player will be able to read andplay a maximum of 50 folders,5 sessions, and 999 files.

Long file names, folder names mayuse more disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space onthe disc, minimise the length of thefile, folder names. You can also playan MP3/WMA CD that was recordedusing no file folders. The systemcan support up to 8 folders in depth,though, keep the depth of thefolders to a minimum in order tokeep down the complexity andconfusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback. If aCD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 5 sessions,and 999 files the player will let you

access and navigate up to themaximum, but all items over themaximum will be ignored.

Root Directory

The root directory will be treated asa folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, thedirectory will be displayed as ROOT.All files contained directly under theroot directory will be accessed priorto any other directory.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directlybeneath them, the player willadvance to the next folder in the filestructure that contains compressedaudio files and the empty folder willnot be displayed or numbered.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files will belocated under the root folder.

The next and previous folderfunctions will have no function on aCD that was recorded withoutfolders.

When displaying the name of thefolder the infotainment system willdisplay ROOT.

When the CD contains onlycompressed audio files, but nofolders, all files will be located underthe root folder. When theinfotainment system displays thename of the folder, the infotainmentsystem will display ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks will be played in thefollowing order:. Playback will begin from the first

track under the root directory.. When all tracks from the root

directory have been played,playback will continue from files,according to their numericallisting.



. After playing the last track fromthe last folder, the player willbegin playing again at the firsttrack of the first folder or rootdirectory.

File System and Naming

The song name in the ID3 tag willbe displayed. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then theinfotainment system will display thefile name without the extension(such as MP3/WMA) instead.

Track names longer than 32characters or 4 pages will beshortened. The display will not showparts of words on the last page oftext and the extension of thefilename will not be displayed.

Playing a MP3/WMA

With the ignition on, insert a CDpartway into the slot, label side up.The player will pull it in, Load, thenFile check, and then MP3 or WMAwill appear on the display. The CDshould begin playing. You cannotinsert a CD with the ACC off.

As each new track starts to play, thetrack number, and the song namewill appear on the display.

If the ignition or infotainment systemis turned off with a CD in the player,it will stay in the player. When a CDis in the player and the ignition isturned on, the infotainment systemmust be turned on before the CDwill start playback. When the ignitionand infotainment system are turnedon, the CD will start playing where itstopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

The CD player can play the smaller3 inch (8 Cm) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitymay be reduced due to CD-Rquality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-Rhas been handled. There may be anincrease in skipping, difficulty infinding tracks, and/or difficulty in

loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottomsurface of the CD. If the surface ofthe CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, theCD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, seeCare of Your CDs for moreinformation.

If there is no apparent damage, try aknown good CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labelling the top of therecorded CD with a marking peninstead.

Notice: If you add any label to aCD, insert more than one CD intothe slot at a time, or attempt toplay scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player.When using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD player



and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error appears on the display,see "CD Messages" later in thissection.

All of the CD functions work thesame while playing an MP3WMA,except for those listed here.

See "Playing a CD" earlier for moreinformation.

All/Directory mode

Repeat, intro-scan, random functionoperate in this folder when all modeis active.

Press the Function button underALL, then the All changes to DIR.

To cancel DIR mode, press theFunction button under DIR again.

ID3 Tag information display

Press the INFORMATION [INFO]button, the infotainment systemdisplays the ID3 tag information ofthe current files.

CD messages

CHECK CD : If this messageappears on the display and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one ofthe following reasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. You are driving on a veryrough road.

When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. The format of the CD may notbe compatible. See "MP3Format" earlier in this section.

. There may have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label may be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If theinfotainment system displays anerror message, write it down andgive it to your dealer when reportingthe problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using an USB/iPod (Only forType 2 optional)

USB/iPod Playback ModeSelection

Press the SOURCE [SRC] button tochange to playing back the USB oriPod files from other mode.

USB/iPod memory insertion

Insert a USB memory stick or iPodconnector into the USB socket, sothe infotainment system plays backthe USB or iPod files automatically.



USB/iPod Extraction

Pull the USB memory stick or iPodconnector from the USB socketby hand.

*Other functions are same withCD mode.

Pause

Press and hold the PAUSE button topause playback while USB memorystick or iPod is playing.

"PAUSE" will flash on the display.

Press and hold the PAUSE buttonagain to start playing the USBor iPod.. If the infotainment system is

connected with aux unit or CDthen pause function won't beenabled.

Next/Previous Track

Press ther TUNE[ buttons, andthen the infotainment system startsplayback of the next/ previous track.

Fast forward/Fast reverse

Press and hold ther TUNE[buttons. Then the infotainmentsystem plays back fast forward/fastreverse.

Next/Previous Folder for MP3/WMA disc only

Press thet SEEKu buttons tostart playback of the next/previousfolder.

RPT (Repeat)

Press the Function button underRPT, then the infotainment systemplays back the current track onrepeat.

To cancel this function, press theFunction button under RPT again.

RDM (Random)

Press the Function button underRDM, then infotainment systemplays back the track randomly.

To cancel this function, press theFunction button under RDM again.

INT (Intro-Scan)

Press the Function button underINT, then the infotainment systemplays back the first few seconds ofall tracks sequentially.

To cancel this function, press theFunction button under INT again.

iPod Navigation Function(Only for Type 2 optional)

iPod Navigation mode

Press the MENU button to choosethe supported category from theiPod instrument.

Next/Previous Category

Press thet SEEKu buttons, andthen press the Function buttonunder ENT, then the infotainmentsystem starts playback.

Cancel or Previous Step

Press the Function button under ←,then the infotainment system goesback to the previous step.



Bluetooth AudioAfter Bluetooth connectionprocedure. (refer to "Pairingprocedure")

A2DP mode

Press the Function button belowAUDIO PLAY on the display.

PLAY

Press the Function button belowkin the display to start playback ofMP3 files on the connectedhandset.

Pause

Press the Function button belowkin the display to pause playbackwhile MP3 file is in playback.

Next/Previous Track

Press the Function button below Q/R in the display, and then the MP3file starts playback of the next/previous track.

Exterior Sound (AUX) Input

The infotainment system has oneauxiliary input jack (diameter3.5mm) located on the lower rightside of the faceplate.

This is not an audio output; do notplug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack.

You can however, connect anexternal audio device such as aniPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, or XM™‚ receiver, etc.to the auxiliary input jack for use asanother source for audio listening.

AUX-In Mode Selection

Press the SOURCE [SRC] (only forType 2) or AUX (only for Type 1/3)button in the other playback mode.

If the auxiliary jack doesn't detectthe presence of an output jack, theaux mode will be prevented fromcoming up.

A-Navigation mode (only forType 2 optional)

A-Navigation Mode Selection

Press the MEDIA button to selectthe A-NAVI mode.



Navigation

Navigation SystemOverview

Introduction

1. Getting started

Safety Information

Before using the navigation system,please read the following safetyinformation. When using the system,these safety rules must be followedto prevent personal injury to youand others and avoid damage toproperty.

Traffic regulations have priority overany instructions from the navigationsystem. Always follow the postedtraffic signs, speed limits and roadrestrictions.

While driving, do not look at thescreen for more than a second or soat a time, and only after decidingyou can do so safely.



For your safety, do not operate thesystem controls while driving. It candistract the driver and may result ina serious accident. Park the vehiclein a safe area before operating thesystem.

Do not disassemble or modify thedevice. If you do, it may result inaccidents, fire, or electrical shock.

Do not pour water or insert foreignobjects into the device. This maycause smoke emissions, fires orshocks.



Do not use the system if you noticeany malfunction such as a frozenscreen or lack of sound. Continueduse of the system may result in anaccident.

Do not park your vehicle in anunauthorised area to operate thesystem.

The various volume settings shouldbe selected so that acoustic signalsfrom outside the vehicle are audibleat all time.



Check the volume prior to turningthe device on. If the volume isturned up when turning the switchon, a loud sound will emit whichmay damage your hearing.

Do not keep the system runningwith the engine stopped. Doing socan drain the vehicle's battery.When you use the system, alwayskeep the engine running.

Do not apply excessive force to thescreen. This may cause the systemto malfunction.



Clean with a cloth slightly moistenedwith water only. Do not usechemical or other domestic cleaningagents, as these could damage thescreen.

Do not place objects on thedashboard. It will affect the sensorwhich controls headlamp anddisplay brightness.

Do not place objects on theinstrument panel or rear windowshelf. Doing so may disrupt the GPSsatellite signal and cause thesystem to operate inaccurately.



If the vehicle's windscreen is tintedwith a reflective metal coating, it willaffect the GPS reception.

Should the liquid crystal panelcrack, do not come into contact withthe liquid coming from the interior ofthe panel. This may lead toinflammation of the skin.. If the liquid is accidentally

ingested, see a doctorimmediately.

. If the liquid gets into the eyes orinto the skin, wash out with alarge amount of water and see adoctor immediately

Do not, under any circumstances,insert SD Card with irregular shapeinto SD Card Slot.

These cards may become jammedor destroy the slot. The unit will thenhave to be exchanged at yourexpense.

The unit may not function properlyin extreme cold or extreme heatconditions. Bring the ambienttemperature back to normal toensure proper operation.

Device components

Control panel

1. NAVI : Navigation

2. MENU : Main Menu

3. TRIP : Driving Information

4. DIM : Switches the displaybetween Day screen and Nightscreen.

5. SD card slot



Steering wheel

1. Power on/off

2. Changing to the next station ortrack

To reach the next station in theselected frequency band or thenext music track

3. Changing modes

Switches between AM. FM, CD,AUX, NAVI and Multimediamode each time the button ispressed.

4. Adjusting Volume

{ Caution

Steering wheel switch may not beavailable depending on the typeof vehicle.

. If you press the MODE orSEEK button repeatedly atshort intervals, CPU overloadmay occur and cause asystem crash.

Basic operations

Starting the System

The navigation system starts whenthe ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position. When thesystem starts, the screen displayslast used mode.

The power will turn OFF whenturning off the engine. After theengine turned off, the system runsfor 30 seconds to save the data.



{ Caution

. Last used mode is savedwhen the engine turned off.

. If you start the system in30 seconds after the key pulloff, the system doesn't needbooting time.

. To reset the system, pressthe MENU and TRIP buttontogether for 10 seconds.Release the buttons when thesystem begins to restart.

System Controls

The following hard keys are locatedon the navigation system.

1. NAVI : Navigation

2. MENU : Main Menu

3. RIP : Driving Information

4. DIM : Brightness Change

Main Menu

Press the MENU hard key to displaythe Main Menu screen. From thisscreen you can reach all of thenavigation system functions. Screenbuttons will be highlighted when afunction is available and disabledwhen they are unavailable.

1. Navigation

2. MP3

3. Movie

4. Trip Information

5. ATC Information

6. Settings



MP3

1. File Information

2. Playing Time

3. Playing Status

4. Current Folder

5. File List

6. Repeat

7. List Control

8. Stop

9. Previous File

10. Play/Pause

11. Next File

12. Higher Folder

13. Random Order

Movie

1. Current Folder

2. File List

3. Higher Folder

4. List control

5. Stop

6. Previous File

7. Play/Pause

8. Next File

9. File List

10. Repeat

11. Full Screen On/Off

12. Playing status



Trip

1. Average Vehicle Speed reset

2. Driving Time reset

3. Average Fuel Consumption reset

4. Average Vehicle Speed

5. Driving Time

6. Average Fuel Consumption

7. Range for Remaining Fuel

8. Display Compass

9. Return to Main Menu

ATC

Besides pressing the ATC button inMain Menu, ATC information isdisplayed on the bottom of thescreen whenever the informationrelevant to the air conditioner suchas temperature, air flow, etc ischanged. This Pop Up screen willbe displayed for 5 seconds.



{ Caution

If you want to know aboutdetailed ATC information, refer toclimate control section.

Settings

1. Screen Touch Calibration

2. System Information

3. System Upgrade

4. Navigation Upgrade

5. User Preference

System setup

Volume

1. MP3, Movie, FM/AM, CD

You can adjust the volume byturning the audio system volumeknob or pressing the steeringwheel switch.

If you press the volume knob,the volume becomes mute.Press again to turn the soundback on.

To turn the sound off, press thevolume knob for 3 seconds. ATCinformation is displayed on thescreen when it turned off.



2. Navigation

You can change the volumelevels of voice guidance inNavigation mode only. You mayalso choose to turn voiceguidance prompts off.

You can't raise or lower thevolume of navigation informationin relation to other audiosources.

Screen

If you press the DIM hard key, thesystem will dim up to 70% of thebrightness.

There are 3 steps to adjust thescreen brightness.

(On → 50% → 70% → On)

Press the DIM hard key for3 seconds to turn off the display.During the screen off, the GPSpositioning function keeps working.The screen turns on again whenany hard key is pressed.

{ Caution

. According to an external light,the screen brightness isautomatically adjusted.

Do not place objects on thedashboard.

Settings

Touch : calibrate the touch screen.

System Information : displays theinformation on the navigationsystem software.

System Upgrade

Navigation Upgrade

User Preference : customise thesystem to better suit your needs.

Touch

You can calibrate the touch screen ifit is not responding accurately toyour taps.

Tap the centre of the target withstylus. When the target moves toanother position, tap the new target.Repeat each time to complete thecalibration process.



System Information

Display the current version of thesystem.

H/W : hardwareS/W : softwareO/S : operating systemGPS : GPS Firmware

System Upgrade

Insert updatable SD card into SDcard slot. (For updatable SD card,Please contact an authorised GMdealer)

Press the MENU hard key andtouch the Settings button.

Press the System Upgrade button.



Press UPGRADE button for systemupgrade. If you do not need toupgrade a particular system, presscheck out to disable.

{ Caution

. To avoid a systemmalfunction do not removeSD card, turn the engine off,or operate the system whileupgrading.

Navigation Upgrade

Insert updatable SD card into SDcard slot. (For purchasing updatablenavigation SD card, Please contactan authorised GM dealer)

Press the MENU hard key andtouch the Settings button.

Press the System Upgrade button.

Press UPGRADE button fornavigation upgrade.

{ Caution

. Depending on the size of thefiles, it takes up to 25 minutesfor update.

User Preference

The navigation system can becustomised to make it easier to use.You can adjust Display Unit,Language, Time Zone.



Confirm the selection by pressingthe Save button.

Display Unit

This allows you to change themeasurement unit used in thesystem.

Distance : Miles or KilometresTemperature : Celsius orFahrenheitVolume : Litre or Gallon

Note: When Gallon is selected forthe volume unit, the distance unit inTrip Information is changed to Milesautomatically.

Language

Select the desired language. Thissystem supports 11 languages fordisplayed text in main menu.Navigation menu supports 11languages for displayed text andvoice commands as well.

Time Zone

Use q r button to set theappropriate time zone. CheckDaylight Savings if it is in effect foryour time zone. (Daylight savings isnot automatically adjusted.)

Time zone list that you can select.



Time Zone Display

Romance Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Brussels

GMT Standard Time (GMT+00:00) London

Western Europe Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Amsterdam

Central European Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Sarajevo

Central Europe Standard Time (GMT+01:00) Belgrade

GTB Standard Time (GMT+02:00) Bucharest

Depending on the position of thedriver of the vehicle, RHD / LHD canbe selected.



System Function1. Multimedia

MP3

Playable MP3 file standard

Compression type MPEG-1 Audio Layer III

Sampling frequency 8,11.025, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32,44.1, 48 (kHz)

Bit rate 8~320 (kbps)

Max. directory layer 8

Max. characters for folder/file name 64 Bytes

Character set for folder/file name A to Z, 0 to 9, _ (underscore)

Max. number of folders 256

Max. number of files 512

ID3 Tag Ver 1.0, Ver 1.1, Ver 2.2, Ver 2.3,Ver 2.4

. A fixed bit rate of 96, 128,192kbps with samplingfrequency of 44.1kHz isrecommended for stable audioquality at playback.

. If the bit rate exceeds 192kbps,there may be sound jumpingduring MP3 playback. Use192kbps or lower bit rate forthe MP3.

{ Caution

. Each file that is not an MP3file is also counted as a file.

How to use the MP3 player

Press the MENU hard key andtouch the MP3 button.

Press the MODE button on steeringwheel until MP3 player is displayed.

The mode changes when you presssteering wheel switch.



AM → FM → CD → AUX → NAVI→ Multimedia → return to AM

1. File Information : Displays thefile currently being played.

2. Playing Time

3. Playing Status

4. Current Folder : Displays thelevel of the file currently beingplayed.

5. File List

6. Repeat : The file currently beingplayed will be repeated.

7. List Control : Moving betweenpages.

8. Stop

9. Previous File : Selects previousmusic file.

10. Play/Pause

11. Next File : Selects nextmusic file.

12. Higher Folder : Displays thenext higher folder level.

13. Random Order : Playing songsin random order.



Movie

Supported file formats

Audio MP3, WMA, OGG, WAV (bit rate128~192kbps)

Video MPEG1/2/4, DivX3.0/4.0/5.0, XviD,WMV7.0/8.0/9.0

DTS Not supported

Max. Resolution 800 x 480

{ Caution

. A Movie which has biggerthan 800x480 resolution maynot be played properly.

. When a Movie is beingplayed, other operation willbecome slower.

. With mixed mode SD Card(combination of audio, moveand data) only the audio or

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

movie files are recognisedand played back dependingon a selected mode.

. For driver safety, movies canbe played only when thevehicle is stationary.

How to use the Movie player

Press the MENU hard key andtouch the Movie button.



1. Current Folder

2. File List

3. Higher Folder

4. List control

5. Stop

6. Previous File

7. Play/Pause

8. Next File

9. File List

10. Repeat

11. Full Screen On/Off

12. Playing Status

SD card. HDD type/CF memory is not

supported.

. DRM (Digital RightsManagement) file format willnot work.

{ Caution

Do not, under any circumstances,insert SD Card with irregularshape into SD Card Slot.

These cards may becomejammed or destroy the slot. Theunit will then have to beexchanged at your expense.



2. Information features

Trip

Trip information displaysdriving-related information bygraphics.

Press the TRIP hard key or pressthe MENU hard key and touch theTrip button.

Press r button to close.

1. Average Vehicle Speed reset

2. Driving Time reset

3. Average Fuel Consumption reset

4. Average Vehicle Speed

5. Driving Time

6. Average Fuel Consumption

7. Range for Remaining Fuel

Shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank. Thisdistance is estimated from the

average fuel economy over thelast several miles, so it will varydepending on speed, traffic, etc.

8. Display Compass : Directions ofvehicle's movement

9. Return to Main Menu

* select reset when you are startinga trip or route that you want torecord.

ATC

ATC information displays the stateof air conditional.



Press the MENU hard key andtouch the ATC button.

ATC information is also displayed bypressing the volume knob of theaudio for 3 seconds.

1. Setting Temperature

2. Outside Temperature

3. Direction of the Wind

4. State of Air Conditional (on/off)

5. State of AUTO (on/off)

6. Power of the Wind

Rear View Camera

When you are trying to park thevehicle, a guideline will be displayedon the screen.

(guideline appears when shiftinggear to reverse)

{ Caution

. This function is not supporteddepending on the type ofvehicle.

. Depending on Rear ViewCamera wholly is dangerouswhen unexpected situation isoccurred. Watch out in alldirections when parking.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

. Guideline is optimisedaccording to vehicle's width.But parking line may notmatch the guideline.

. Lower the volume (MP3,Navigation) so that you canhear the parking alert.

. Pulling out SD Card deviceduring Rear View Cameramode may cause the deviceto malfunction.

Getting Started

Welcome to a-navi system

Thank you for choosing AdvancedNavigation System ("A-NaviSystem") as your in-car navigator inEurope. This manual is a detaileddescription of the navigationsoftware. You can easily learn touse it; and we still recommend you

read this manual to understandscreens and operation steps ofA-Navi System.

1. Precautions. For your safety concern, we

recommend that you operateA-Navi System before startingthe journey. Do not operateA-Navi System while driving asthis might lead to collision ordamage. Please ask yourpassenger to operate it ifnecessary.

. Local driving regulations anddriving conditions have to beobserved all the time. They haveprecedence over the drivinginstructions given by A-NaviSystem.

. Although all safetyconsiderations have been takeninto account while designing theA-Navi System, the use ofnavigation system does notrelease the driver from driver'sresponsibility for proper andprudent behaviour on the road.

2. Introduction to a-navi system. Quick and Easy to Learn — you

can learn how to operate iteasily within 3 minutes.

. Intelligent Multi-MapManagement — A-Navi Systemdo not require you change mapswhen you navigate between mapsegments or countries. Youcould move map screen in anydirection and check POIinformation on map.

. Fast Visualised Positioning —you can very quickly locate thecurrent position and getinformation about the nextturning point.

. Smooth Map Scrolling — Whendriving, the map will scroll upand down on the screen in orderto help you get an overview ofyour location (or position).

. Zoom In/Out — The map scaleadjusts according to the drivingspeed. This allows you to have aproper view of the map.



. Day/Night Mode Switch — thebacklight of the map and thecolour of the indicator of theposition fix can be changedmanually. This gives you a bettervisualisation of the map at night.

. Two Waypoints — allow 2waypoints at most and it guidesyou to your destination oneby one.

. 23 POI Categories — A-NaviSystem allows you to search forrestaurants, airports, petrolstations, etc. in a veryconvenient and easy way.

. Reasonable Route Planning — ittakes all traffic regulations, suchas one-way restrictions, turnrestrictions, and so on intoconsideration when planning aroute; besides that, user canchange route options based onthe driving preference orconditions.

. Information about Turning Points— provided with the detailedinformation of each turning point

of a proposed route, you canview all turning points along yourentire trip.

. Schematic Map of Inter-Crossing— Clear schematic illustration ofeach junction guarantees youview it in advance and keepsyou on the right track to yourdestination.

. Information about GPS Satellites— You can view the status andnumber of signals received fromGPS satellites.

. Track Log — A-Navi Systemlogs your trip information. Thisinformation can be replayed orre-used for future trips.

. Multi-POI locations — Displaytwo or more POIs with the sameor close location.

. Navigation in tunnel andunderground car parking —gyroscope free inertialnavigation system helps younever get lost despite no GPSsignal.

. Off-Road Navigation — whenyou drive off road, system willautomatically store currentposition and travelled pathon map.

. Left/Right-hand Drive — you canchange the left/right layoutbetween map and NavigationInfo Column to follow localregulations and driving customs.

. Vehicle Speed Display on/off —display or hide current vehiclespeed.

. Motorway Signpost — displayingdistance from your currentposition to next exit.

. Multi-language Support —support 11 Voices andlanguages.

. Safety Alert for Speeding —Safety Alert is based on legalspeed limits on different types ofroad. System will alarm you byvoice guidance when you areapproaching the speed limit for



the road. In addition, you can seta speed tolerance from 0to 20%.

Getting started

A-Navi System is a good choice forin-car navigation. You can easilyuse it by tapping the screen ordrawing the map with your fingers.

Quick reference

This chapter gives you a briefintroduction of how to use A-NaviSystem. Before we explore all thedetailed functionalities provided bythis application, please makesure that:. A-Navi System searches for

positioning information from atleast three satellites and yourposition is fixed once theapplication starts.

When you use the GPS receiver forthe first time, it may take2-3 minutes to secure satelliteinformation and orientate accurateposition (Cold start). Your positionfix is stored in the memory. Forsubsequent use of the GPSreceiver, it will only take 1-3 minutesto locate your position (Warm start).Once your position is fixed by theGPS receiver, the system startsnavigation immediately without anyextra operation when you start theapplication.

2. Getting started

Picture 2.1 Welcome Screen. When starting A-Navi System for

the first time, the system entersChevrolet "Welcome" screen.

It takes about 15s toautomatically switch "Welcome"screen to "Caution" Screen.



Picture 2.2 System Caution. Please read A-Navi System

Caution carefully and click

Press "Agree" button to enter"Free Navi Map" screen.

Picture 2.3 Free Navi Map. In Free Navi Map, you could let

system go without any operationand it tracks your driving route.

Picture 2.4 Free Navigation Menu. If you want to access more

functions, please touch MainMenu on Free Navi Map; Systemthen enter Free Navi Menuscreen.

In Free Navi Menu, you can accesskey functions of A-Navi System asbelow:. Touch "Go to" to set

destination(S).. Touch ":Map Options" to change

map parameters.



. Touch "Settings" to change allsettings parameters.

. Touch the hot keys and thesystem will be back tonavigation map.

When you use A-Navi System forthe first time, you may want tochange the language of the system.

3. Route & free navigation maps

Route/Free navigation map screenis the most frequently used screenof A-Navi System. Free navigationmap screen displays when you coldstart A-Navi System, while RouteNavigation Map displays when youcontinue last navigation when yourestart the system.



Picture 2.5 Route Navigation Map



Picture 2.6 Free Navi Map



1. Car Icon — indicates the currentposition and driving direction.

2. Turning sign — The sliver arrowshows you which road youshould take at the approachingturning point.

3. Current road — the field isempty if the road is unnamed.

4. Next road — the name of thenext approaching road.

5. Turning scheme— show theroad structure at the nextturning; and by touching thisicon, system will announce thenext turning information such as"About 900 metres, turn left".

6. Distance to next turn — showyou the distance to next turningpoint virtually.

7. Distance progress bar

8. Current Speed — show currentdriving speed.

9. Distance-to-go — Remainingdistance between start anddestination or next waypoint.

10. ETA — Estimated time toarrival at destination.

11. Speed Alert — shows youspeed cameras ahead and thespeed limits

12. GPS Status — touch to viewGPS Status; Grey means GPSsignal is weak or GPS has notbeen fixed while Green meansGPS has been fixed.

13. Volume — touch to adjust thevolume for voice guidance.

14. Compass — indicates theNorth of the map.

15. Scale Bar — indicate scaleof map.

16. Zoom in button — touch tozoom in on the map.

17. Zoom out button — touch tozoom out pn the map.

18. Main Menu— touch to enterRoute Navi Menu.

19. Driving speed — the currentdriving speed.

20. Longitude /Latitude — showsthe longitude and Latitude ofcurrent map centre.

21. Current Time

22. Main Menu — touch to enterFree Navi Menu.

4. Keyboards

A-Navi System providesalphabetical-format keyboard whichincludes Latin alphabets, numeric,punctuation and especially specialcharacters/symbols in 30languages.

ABC-type Keyboard only containsletters.



Picture 2.7 Alphabetic-formatKeyboard

123: touch to display numeric andpunctuation.

GER: touch to display specialsymbols in Germany.

t : touch to switch special symbolkeyboards in other countries.

Picture 2.8 Numeric Keyboard

v : touch and return to ABCkeyboard.

u : Space key.

0 : touch and delete last letter youentered.

Picture 2.9 Special SymbolKeyboard

4 : touch and return to theprevious screen.

On Map: touch and display thelocation of highlighted recordon map.

OK: Confirm keyboard entry orselection.



Using the NavigationSystem

Selecting a destination -go to?

Picture 3.1 Free Navi Map

Picture 3.2 Free Navi Menu

In order to navigate with A-NaviSystem or to plan a route, you firstof all have to enter a destination andthen calculate a route.

In "Free Navi Map? (Picture 3.1)touch "Main Menu" to enter "FreeNavi Menu" (Picture 3.2), and thentouch "Go to" to enter the "SearchMenu" (Picture 3.3).

Picture 3.3 Search Menu

In Search Menu, A-Navi Systemprovides you six different ways ofspecifying an address, city,POI(Point of Interest) and otherlocations which you can select asstart or destination. This chapter willdetail the operation steps oneby one.



1. Search destination by address

Picture 3.4 Address Search

For example: No.25,Senkenberganlage, Frankfurt,Germany

1. Touch "Address Search" on"Search Menu" screen ;. In the "Search Menu"

screen (Picture 3.4), touch"Country" to enter the"Country Search" screen(Picture 3.5).

Picture 3.5 Country Search

2. Select one among Europeancountries;. In "Country Search"

Screen, the default countryis the recent search country"Germany". You couldtouchx orw to browsecountry list and select oneamong 41 Europeancountries.

Picture 3.6 City Search

3. In order to specify thedestination, first enter city name,and select the desired city;. You could enter the name

of the city, or the prefix, andthe system willautomatically list all citiesmatching the input letters.

. Touch the desired city andtouch "OK" to confirm thecity selection. The systemreturns to the "AddressSearch" screen(Picture 3.7)



Picture 3.7 Address Search

4. Now enter the road name, andselect the desired road;. In "Address Search"

screen, touch the Roadinput field and enter "RoadSearch" screen.

Picture 3.8 Road Search. In the "Road Search"

screen, enter road name orthe prefix on keyboard.

. Once road is selected,touch "OK", then return tothe "Address Search"screen.

Picture 3.9 Enter House No.

5. Enter the house number;. After specifying the road,

touch the field of "click hereand search house number"to enter the House Noscreen.



Picture 3.10 Enter House No.. Enter house number on

keyboard and touch "OK" toreturn "Address Search"screen.

If the house number youentered does not exist, thesystem will regard the firstresult as default position.

Picture 3.11 Check Locationon map

6. Tap "On map" to check thelocation of input address ordirectly tap "OK" and go to"Route Plan".. Now you can touch "On

Map" to check the locationof the specified addresson map.

. Then touch "OK", thesystem will enter "RoutePlan" screen to startnavigating.

Picture 3.12 Route Plan. In Route Plan screen, you

can touch "Go" to startnavigating, or startsimulating navigation bytouching "Simulate".

Alternative way is to locate bycrossroad.

Options: after specify the road,then directly select the crossroad.



Picture 3.13 Crossroad Search. In "Address Search" screen,

touch the Crossroad input fieldand enter "Crossroad" screen.It displays a list of availablecrossroads along the"Senkenberganlage". Thenselect the desired crossroad andtouch "On Map" to view thevirtual road location.

Picture 3.14 Address Search. You also could search the

crossroad by entering the nameor the prefix, and the system willautomatically list all roadsmatching the search criteria.Highlight the name of thedesired road and touch "OK" toreturn to the "Address Search"screen (Picture 3.14).

2. Search a destination by POL

Picture 3.15 Search Menu

A point of interest (POI) is a locationthat a user may find useful andinteresting. POI locations aremarked on the map with specialicons.

A-Navi System provides 23categories of POIs, such asaccommodation, petrol station,restaurants, sights, etc. POIs of thesame category shares the sameicon. If you save your own POI orfavourite or address, you can selectan icon for your own.



Picture 3.16 POI Menu

A-Navi System provides three waysto search POI: search POI nearcurrent position, search POI in cityand search POI by telephonenumber.

(1) Search POL in city

For example: Terminal 1, Frankfurt

Picture 3.17 Specify the country

1. Touch "POI in City" in "POIMenu" screen;. System will enter "Country

Search" screen(Picture 3.17);

. In "Country Search"Screen, the default countryis the recent search country"Germany". You couldtouchx orw to browsecountry list and select oneamong 41 Europeancountries.

Picture 3.18 Specify the city

2. Then enter city and select onecity among results;. you can enter the whole city

name or the prefix onkeyboard, system willautomatically list allmatched results.

. Touch "OK" and enter "POICategory Selection" screen.

If you want to change city,touch4 to return "CitySearch" screen.



Picture 3.19 Select POI Category

3. Now select the POI category;. Once you confirm POI

category, then touch "Next"and enter "POI Search"screen.

Picture 3.20 Search POI in City

4. Select a POI among results orenter the name of desired POI;. In the "POI Search" screen,

the system willautomatically list POIsaround the city defaultposition. You could selectthe desired one or enter thename on keyboard.

. When the POI is specified,you could touch "On Map"to check the POI location.

Picture 3.21 City POI on Map

5. Check the location of the POI;

. touch4 to return "POI inCity" screen.



Picture 3.22 Route Plan Screen

6. Touch "OK" confirm the POIselection and enter “Route Plan"screen.. Once you have finished the

POI search, touch "OK" andthe system willautomatically enter "RoutePlan" screen (Picture 3.22)and the POI will bedisplayed in thedestination list.

(2) Search POI near currentposition

"POI near Current Position" displays100 POIs at most around yourcurrent position from near to far.Please notice that: When GPSfixed, "current position" is the placewhere your vehicle is located. WhenGPS does not fix, "current position"is the latst GPS-fixed location.

Picture 3.23 POI Menu Screen

1. Select POI near current position;. Select "POI near Current

Position" in POI Menu andenter "POI CategorySelection" screen.



Picture 3.24 POI CategorySelection

2. Select one POI category.

. You could touchx orwto view more categories.When you confirm theselection, touch "Next" andsystem enter "Nearest POIlist". If you are not sure ofthe category, you can select"All POI", then the systemwill display POIs of allcategories near currentposition.

Picture 3.25 Nearest POI List

3. Select one POI among resultsand touch "OK" to enter "RoutePlan" screen.

In "Nearest POI List" screen,you could:

A. select one POI (see P3.25);

B. touch keyboard to enter POIname or the prefix(see P3.26).

C. check POI location on map(see P3.27);

Picture 3.26 Enter POI Name



Picture 3.27 Nearest POI on Map

(3) Search POI by Phone


1. Touch "POI Search by Phone"on "POI Menu" screen.. System will enter "City

Search" screen(PictureP 3.29).


2. Select one country;. In "Country Search"

Screen, the default countryis the recent search country"Germany". You couldtouchx orw to browse

country list and select oneamong 41 Europeancountries.

Picture 3.30 City Search Screen

3. Enter the city name and choosethe desired city;. You can enter the city name

or the prefix, and thesystem will automaticallydisplay all the matchingresults.

. Select the desired city andtouch "OK" to enter "PhoneNo Search" screen.



Picture 3.31 Enter POI Phone No.

4. Enter Telephone number andselect one POI in results.. System automatically

displays City Code andPOIs near the default citycentre.

. Enter telephone onkeyboard and touch "OK" toenter "Route Plan" screen.

3. Select destination in recentdestinations

A-Navi System saves 50 recentdestinations at most so that you canaccess them quickly next time.

Picture 3.32 Search Menu Screen

1. Touch "Recent Destination" on"Search Menu" screen.. In the "Search Menu"

screen (Picture 3.32), touch"Recent Destinations" toenter the "RecentDestination" screen(Picture 3.33).

Picture 3.33 RecentDestination List

2. Select one destination youdesire.. Select the recent

destination you want to setas destination andtouch "OK".

Options: Touch "On Map" tocheck the location ofdestination

3. Touch "OK" and enter "RoutePlan" screen.



When successfully operated, thesystem will automatically return tothe "Route Plan" screen and displaythe selected one in thedestination list.

4 : Return to last screen.

Delete: Delete one destination.

On Map: touch and display chosendestination on map.

OK: Confirm the selecteddestination.

w : touch and enter last screen.Grey button means this functiondisabled.

x : touch and enter next screen.

4. Select a point on map asdestination

A-Navi System supports setting adestination by scrolling the map tothe desired location.


1. Touch "Map" on "Search Menuscreen";. The system enter the "Map

Search" screen(Picture 3.35).

Picture 3.35 Search destinationon Map

2. Scroll the map and tap on onepoint on map;. On the "Map Search"

screen (Picture 3.35), youcan find places that you areinterested in by zooming in/out or moving the map;

. Meanwhile, you can touchon the POI or road to viewits information(Picture 3.36).



. You could touch r to checkthe other POI informationwhen more than one POI islocated at one point.

Picture 3.36 Check POI infoon Map

3. Touch "OK" and enter "RoutePlan" screen.. After you find your

destination, touch "OK" toadd it as a destination.

5. Search a destination bycoordinates

If you know the geographiccoordinates of your destination, youcan navigate to the desired locationby entering Coordinates.


1. Touch "Coordinates" on "SearchMenu" screen;. In the "Search Menu"

screen (Picture 3.37),select "Coordinates" toenter the "CoordinatesInput" screen (Picture 3.38).

Picture 3.38 Degree Format

2. Touch "Format" to change thetype of coordinates;

A-Navi System supports twokinds of coordinate formatinputs: Degree Format (Picture3.38) and Digital Format (Picture3.39). You can touch the"Format" button to switchbetween these two formats.

3. Enter the coordinates andtouch "OK".



Picture 3.39 Digital Format

In the Degree format, touch the"Lon" (Longitude) input area (Picture3.38. You should input "E" (EastLongitude) or "W" (West Longitude)before you input the degree numberof the longitude. Before inputtingthe degree number of the latitude,you should input "N" (NorthLatitude) or "S" (South Latitude).

In the Digital format, you shouldinput "—" (West Longitude/SouthLatitude) before you input the digitalnumber of the longitude or thelatitude.

6. Select a destination inaddress book

You can save your home addressand other favourite places in theAddress Book.


1. Touch "Address Book" on"Search Menu" screen;. In the "Search Menu"

screen (Picture 3.40),select "Address Book" toenter the "Address Book"screen .

Picture 3.41 Address Book Screen

2. Select one Address or POI andtouch "OK".. Select one address you

want to set as destinationand touch "OK".

When successfully operated, thesystem will automatically return tothe "Route Plan" screen and displaythe selected one in thedestination list.



7. UK postcode


1. Touch "UK Postcode" on"Search Menu" screen;. In the "Search Menu"

screen (Picture 3.42),select "UK Postcode" toenter the "Postcode Input"screen (Picture 3.43).

Picture 3.43 Postcode InputScreen

2. Enter UK Postcode andtouch OK;

Picture 3.44 Postcode Result

3. Select the desired postcode;



Picture 3.45 Location on map

4. Check the location on map.

8. Go home

A-Navi System enables you tonavigate directly to a specifiedhome address in an easy andefficient way. In the "Main Menu"(Picture 3.46), select "Go Home"and the system will automaticallystart navigating to the position ofMy Home.

Picture 3.46 Search Menu Screen. If the place of My Home has not

been specified, when you touch"Go Home", the system willprompt as Picture 3. 46.

Picture 3.47 System Prompt. Touch "Yes", the system enters

"Search Menu" screen to set uphome address.



Picture 3.49 Route Plan Screen. After specifying home address,

system enter "Route Plan"screen.

Please refer to "Route Plan"operation details.

Route plan

Picture 4.1 Route Plan

With A-Navi system you can enterthe desired destination and alsospecify how the route is to becalculated.

A-Navi System enables to set twowaypoints during navigation. Thesystem calculates a proposed routeaccording to the sequence of thewaypoints you specified, and guidesyou to the final destination.

After you enter waypoints/destination, the system enters"Route Plan" screen. This chapterwill describe all the functions of thisscreen.

1. Destination management

(1) Add or delete destination(s)

A-Navi System allows you to add upto two waypoints and destinations.Usually the start point is theGPS-fixed current position.

+ Add: touch it and enter "SearchMenu" to search waypoint/destination.

- Delete: touch it and the highlightwaypoint/destination in yellow isdeleted.

(2) Change the sequence ofdestination

w : touch it to move up the highlightwaypoint/destination.

x : touch it to move down thehighlight waypoint/destination.



Grey key means the function isdisabled.

(3) Display destination on map

Picture 4.2 Destination on Map. In "Route Plan" screen, touch

"On Map" and enter the maplocation of the highlightwaypoint/destination. Here itallows you:

A. To pin on the map and checkinformation of the waypoint/destination.

B. To zoom out/in;

C. To draw the map in alldirections

2. Route options

A-Navi System offers you optimisedsettings of navigation. Thesesettings are the basis parametersfor calculating the route.

Picture 4.3 Route Options. Touch "Options" on "Route Plan"

screen and enter "RouteOptions" screen(Picture 4.3).

A-Navi System enable user to selectroad type and routing styleaccording to different navigation

situations. The default setting isQuickest Route and Use ofMotorway, Use of Ferries and AllowTolls. You may touch eachparameter to change the mode orstyle.

Road type:

‐ Use of Motorway: most use ofmotorway

‐ Use of Motorway: least use ofmotorway

‐ Use of Ferries: most use offerries

‐ Use of Ferries: least use offerries

‐ Avoid Toll Roads

‐ Avoid Toll Roads: allow toll roads

Routing style:

Fastest Time: calculates a quickestpossible route and you could travelat or near speed limit. ShortestDistance: takes you to your



destination using the most directroute possible. Therefore you travelthe minimum kilometres.

4 : touch and return to "RoutePlan" screen.

OK: touch to confirm route optionsettings and return "Route Plan"screen.

3. Select navigation mode

A-Navi System totally has threenavigation modes as below:

Route Navigation: real-timenavigation among start, waypointand destination.

Simulate Navigation: lifelikesimulation of the routing amongstart, waypoint and destination.It enables you to check POI or routeinformation along the route.Simulate mode is mostly used whenno GPS position is present.

Free Navigation: real-timenavigation without destination whenGPS position has been fixed.

Route Navigation: real-timenavigation between start anddestination when GPS position hasbeen fixed.

In the "Route Plan" screen you canselect between two modes: RouteNavi (Navigation) (Picture 4.4).orSimulate (Picture 4.5).

Picture 4.4 Route Plan-Go

Picture 4.5 Route Plan-Simulate. touch "Go" means you select

route navigation mode. And thesystem will automatically enter"Route Calculating" screen andwait for GPS signal (Picture 4.5)



Picture 4.6 Calculating route

Before route calculation finishes,you can touch the " Cancel" buttonat any time to end the operation.

Picture 4.7 System Prompt. In Route Plan screen, touch

"Simulate" and system willprompt that would you like tochange the starting point?If yes, system will enter"Search Menu".If No, system will enterPicture 4.6.

Picture 4.8 Start Navigating. After route calculation and when

GPS position has been fixed, thesystem will begin navigating.

. Start navigation.

Navigation

After selecting destination andplanning route, the systemcalculates the optimised route andstart navigation.

All the information you need fordriving is provided clearly andcomprehensively in the Route NaviMap. Meanwhile, you can set



additional navigation settings or doother possible navigation operationson Route Navi Menu.

Picture 5.1 Route Navi Map. On "Route Navi Map" screen,

Touch Main menu to enter RouteNavi Menu.

Picture 5.2 Route Navi Menu

1. Map options

Picture 5.3 Map Options

You can access Map Options bothfrom Free Navi Menu and RouteNavi Menu.



Map Options functions are availableas below:

Auto-map rotation

Picture 5.4 North Up

Picture 5.5 Heading Up

"Heading Up": Rotates mapaccording to the direction ofmovement.

"North Up": Map is fixed to keepfacing North and allows you to viewdriving conditions ahead.

Picture 5.6 2D Map



Picture 5.7 3D Map

2D/3D: to switch the map between2D and 3D style.

Picture 5.8 Day Mode

Picture 5.9 Night Mode

Day/Night: to switch the mapbackground between day andnight mode.

Motorway Signpost: turns thefunction to display motorwaysignpost on map on/off.

Voice Guidance. NO voice guidance to instruct

you at each turn.. Voice guidance instructs you at

each turn.

Auto Zoom. Automatically adjusts the map

scale according to driving speedand provides you a better viewof the map.

. Manually adjust the map scale.

Simulation Speed

This allows you to set a drivingspeed during a simulated trip. Theranges of simulation speed are50 km/h (mph), 100 km/h (mph),



150 km/h (mph), 200 km/h (mph),250 km/h (mph) and300 km/h (mph).

2. Route information

Picture 5.10 Route Information. In the "Route Navi Menu" screen

(Picture 5.4), touch "RouteInformation" to display the entireroute in text (Picture 5.10).

. Route Information includes:Start, Destination, distance, nextstreet name, distance betweentwo turns, and turn type. Forexample: drive along

"Kennedyallee" for 2KM andmake a right turn to "MorfeldrLandstraBe".

3. Route plan

Picture 5.11 Route Plan

A-Navi system enables you tochange destination or add moredestinations during navigation.. touch "Route Plan" on "Route

Navi Menu" screen.

4. Detour

Picture 5.12 Detour. In the "Route Navi Menu"

screen, touch on "Detour"(Picture 5.2) to enter the"Detour" screen (Picture 5.12).



Picture 6.20 Detour. In the event of a traffic jam, you

can estimate the distance to theblocking point and select anappropriate option, A-NaviSystem will calculate a detour.

5. Recalculate

Picture 5.13 Recalculate

When you think the currentrecommended route is notreasonable or you want to viewanother route between start anddestination, you can touch"Recalculate" and the system entersroute calculation screen.

6. Terminate

By touching the button "Terminate",the system will stop navigation andenter Free Navigation Map.

7. Auto-routing

With the consideration for drivingsafely, A-Navi System provides theauto-routing function that worksunder two circumstances:. Auto starting navigation: After

setting up a destination, touchon "Go" in the "Route Plan"screen and A-Navi System willautomatically start thenavigation. Below we willdescribe the procedure:

1.1. Proceed to the next step ifGPS signals are received.Otherwise, wait to receiveGPS signals;

1.2. Set the current GPSposition as starting point,use the optimal route andstart navigation.



. Auto re-routing: If you haveaccidentally missed arecommended turning pointabout 100 meters, A-NaviSystem will activate re-routingmodule to calculate a new route.This guarantees you will neverget lost.

Setup Menu

Setting

Picture 6.1 Free Navi Menu

Picture 6.2 Route Navi Menu

Settings open a selection of optionsallowing you to customise A-NaviSystem to your needs.

There are 11 setting items that canbe accessed from "Settings" screenin Free Navi Menu or RouteNavi Menu.



Picture 6.3 Settings_1 Picture 6.4 Settings_2

1. Volume

Picture 6.5 Volume

. touch "Volume" in the "Settings"screen (Picture 6.3) to enter the"Volume" screen (Picture 6.5).

. touch "-" to adjust volume lowerwhile touch "+" to make volumelouder.

. touchy to make thesystem mute.

Once you have configured thesettings, touch "OK" and the systemwill save your settings and return tothe "Settings" screen.

2. Safety alert

Speeding Alert warns you when youexceed the local road speed limit.This setting allows you to decidewhether you want to receivespeeding alerts or not.



Picture 6.6 Safety Alert. touch "Safety Alert" in the

"Settings" screen (Picture 6.3) toenter the "Safety Alert" screen(Picture 6.6).

When speeding alert turns on, youcan set speeding tolerance value to0%, 5%, 10%, 15% and 20%.

3. Trace record

A-Navi System logs all positioninginformation received from GPSreceiver during navigation. It drawsthe route taken on map, whichenables you to review the historic

track information when youre-launch the navigation systemnext time. This function is veryuseful when you drive in rural areassuch as deserts or forests.

Picture 6.7 Trace Record. By touching "Record On", user

switch on trace record function;while touching "Record Off",user close trace record function.

. All trace record will be displayedon screen. If you select onerecord and touch "Show", it willdisplay the trace record on map.

4. Address book management

A-Navi System can save up to 100Address/POIs.

Picture 6.8 Address BookManagement

. touch "Add" to enter "SearchMenu" to search/add address/POI to Address Book.

. touch "Delete" to delete onerecord in Address Book.

. touch "On Map" to view theaddress location on map.

. touch "Edit" to enter "AddressBook Edit" screen.



Picture 6.9 Address Book Edit. touch the field you want to edit,

and touch the keyboard after thecursor jumps to the field. Youcan touch "123" or "SYM" toswitch input format.

Picture 10 POI Icon Selection

. touch9 on Picture 6.9 to enter"POI Icon Selection" screen.

Day/night mode switch

A-Navi System manually orautomatically adjusts the map colourscheme to the different brightness ofthe day or night.

Picture 6.10 Day/Night ModeSwitch

. When "Manually" turns on, youcould switch map mode betweenDay and Night. Manually switchfunction disable automaticswitch, vice versa.

. When "Automatic" turns on, youneed to set daytime.

Daytime could be set to start from"5:00-9:00 AM" and end at"5:00-9:00 PM".



6. Set home address

Picture 6.11 Settings. Touch "Set Home Address" and

enter "Search Menu" screen.

7. GPS status

Picture 6.12 GPS Status. In the "Settings" screen (Picture

6.3), touch on "GPS Status" todisplay the "GPS status" screen(Picture 6.12).

In the "GPS status" screen, you canget following information:

1. GPS active: GPS has fixedcurrent position. GPS inactive:GPS does not fix a position.

2. Position of satellites: the relativeorientation of satellites to currentposition fix;

1. Date: the date of a GPS positionfix, e.g. 13-02;

2. Time: the time (always shown asGMT) of a GPS position fix, e.g.15:20:34

3. Vehicle speed: the speed of aGPS position fix.

4. Altitude: the altitude of a GPSposition fix.

5. HDOP: horizontal dilution ofprecision

6. Number of Satellites: 8

7. Longitude: the longitude of aGPS-fixed position, e.g. 8°34'27E

8. Latitude: the latitude of aGPS-fixed position, e.g. 47°24'51N;



8. Language

Picture 6.13 Select Language. You can select voice/program

language by touching thelanguage icon.

. Touch "OK" and return toSettings.

9. Right/left-hand drive

Picture 6.14 Settings_2

For better visibility, A-Navi Systemprovides a different UI layout for Left/Right hand Drive cars.

Picture 6.15 Left-hand Drive



Picture 6.16 Right-hand Drive

10. Measure unit


You can set the distance unit to bekilometres or miles.

11. Driving speed display ON/OFF


Generally vehicle speed displays onNavigation Map.

However vehicle speed is notalways right because of GPS signaldeviation. This function enables youto turn speed display function on/off.

If you see, "Display On" symbolvehicle speed doesn't display; touchto turn on vehicle speed displayfunction and vice versa.

12. About

Picture 6.19 About. About provide information about

A-Navi System:

A. Product Model

B. Software Version

C. Map Data Version



Appendix

1. Attention

It is not a system failure underthe circumstances listed below:

Situations that can affect the GPSpositioning:. Sometimes, when you are

driving on the motorway/viaduct,the floating point swings.

. When you are driving on a verysteep road.

. When you are driving on spiralroad, you will find that thefloating point swings. It isnothing to do with the radius ofthe road and the driving speedof your vehicle. One reasonmight be that the real roadcondition may differ from theinformation on theelectronic map.

. When you make a right/left turnto enter a road that has parallelroads nearby (less than 50 m

distance), you might find that thefloating point may go toanother road.

. When driving on a wide road in asnaky line, you may experiencethat the floating point swings dueto the mismatch of real distance.

. Before returning to ground levelroad after you have been drivingin an underground car park orthe spiral path of the multi-levelcar park, you will find that thefloating point may swing. Whenyour car is in a rotary elevator,the arrow of the floating pointmay not point to the rightdirection.

. Providing voice prompt at abranching path ahead.

. The guided distance maydeviate from the actualdistance rate.

When any of those situationsoccurs, the GPS satellite willautomatically adjust the currentposition fix if you keep driving.

Problems caused by map files:. When you return from a road

which is newly constructed to aroad recorded in map file, youmay find floating point swingsbecause the map file may notreflect the real road conditions.After you have driven for a while,the system will adjust to the rightposition using GPS signalinformation

. No through way due to roadclosure or pedestrian path

. Opening of a new road andclosure of old road;

. Guide to a no-through road;

. Route re-computed againwithout changing the proposedroute;

. Guide to a normal road insteadof a viaduct, or vice versa;

. If there are only small laneswithout a normal road near thedestination, the system will onlyguide you to a place near to yourdestination;



. Instruct you to make a U-turn;

. No indication at abranching road;

. Turning instruction mismatchwith the real road condition;

. No indication of direction orvoice prompt about entrance/exitwhile guiding on motorway/expressway.

. Schematic map may mismatchreal road conditions.

Places having difficulties inreceiving GPS signals. In tunnels;. Between high buildings;. Under viaducts;. In trees/forests;

When using an external GPS aerial,we recommend that you place it onthe roof of the car. If there is a rackon the roof of your car, please makesure to separate the rack and theaerial.

GPS is managed by the USDepartment of Defense. It maypurposely reduce the accuracy ofthe GPS signals so that the floatingpoint may swing.

Use Notice. The floating point may swing

before the GPS signal isreceived when you turn thepower on.

. The floating point may swingwhen you use the system thefirst time after installation.

. The system will automaticallyadjust its position and directionusing GPS signals when thefloating point mismatches realconditions.



2. POI icons

Icon Name Icon Name Icon Name

All POI Government Office Airport

Medical Automotive Museum

Business Music Centre Company




Restaurants Centre ofSettlement

Accommodation

Finance Night Life Parking

Services Petrol Station Sights




Recreation Shopping Police Station

Zoo Railway Station

Phone

Bluetooth

Pairing procedure

Press the BLUETOOTH [4 ] . Thenit moves on the pairing procedure.

1. Press the Function button below"PAIRING" in the display.

2. Search & select the devicename "CAR AUDIO" forBluetooth on a phone.

The audio will display the name ofthe connected device for 3 seconds.

The audio will return "ModeSelection" after connectionprocedure and "BT" will bedisplayed.



Auto Connection

1. The audio will try to connectprevious BT device automaticallywhen infotainment systempower on.

2. BT device which connects theaudio set comes back to theaudio unit after the BT device isout of 10m distance from anaudio set, The audio set will tryto connect the BT deviceautomatically.

Hands-Free Phone

Taking calls

Making a call

1. Press the Function button belowCall in the display.

2. Press the Function button belowLast Call in the display.

The audio will display "Dialling..."and "Connected".

Incoming Call

The audio will display "IncomingCall..." for 3 seconds, then the audiowill display "Incoming call number"until user presses the Functionbutton below ANSWER or DECLINEin the display.

1. Press the Function button belowANSWER in the display, thenthe audio will be on line.

2. Press the Function button belowDECLINE in the display, theaudio unit will return to thelast mode.

On Line

Press the Function button belowMIC MUTE in the display whenusing the phone, microphoneis mute.

Press the Function button belowPRIVATE in the display or thePOWER button during using aphone, the mode will change to"private mode".

Press the Function button belowHANG UP in the display while usingthe phone. The audio will return tothe last mode.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsHeating and VentilationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . 8-3Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Electronic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Auxiliary Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Air VentsAdjustable Air Vents . . . . . . . . . 8-14Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air Conditioning RegularOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Climate Control Systems

Heating and Ventilation System

Controls for:

1. Temperature control knob.

2. Air distribution mode knob.

3. Fan control knob.

4. Air conditioning (A/C) button.

5. Recirculation button.

6. Rear window and outside mirrordefroster button.


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature control knob

You may control the rate of airflowcoming from the system by turningthe fan speed control knob. Turn theknob clockwise to increase the fanspeed and anti-clockwise todecrease the fan speed.

The fan control knob is adjustablefrom the off position through tostep 4.

Fan control knob

You may control the rate of airflowcoming from the system by turningthe fan speed control knob. Turn theknob clockwise to increase the fanspeed and anti-clockwise todecrease the fan speed.

The fan control knob is adjustablefrom the off position through tostep 4.

Air distribution mode knob

Adjust the air distribution knob tothe desired mode which you want todirect the air flow.

The air distribution knob can be setin one of five positions:

Front (E): This setting directs airthrough centre and side vents.

Bi-level (\): Directs most of theair through the floor vents. Some ofthe air will also be directed to thewindscreen defroster vents, sidevents, and rear vents. Keep the



area under the front seats clear inorder not to block the airflow to therear compartment.

Floor/Defrost (-): This modedirects most of the air throughwindscreen defroster vents, frontdoor window defroster vents and thefloor vents. A small amount of air isalso directed to the side vents.

Defrost (0): Directs most of theair through the windscreen and frontdoor window defroster vents.A small amount of air is alsodirected to the side vents.

Recirculation mode button

Press this button when driving industy conditions or to avoid trafficpollution or outside fumes, andwhen quick cooling or heating of thepassenger area is required. Theindicator light will illuminate andinterior air will be recirculated.

Pressing the recirculation modebutton again will draw outside airinto the passenger compartment.The indicator will go out.

Your windows may mist up if youuse the recirculation mode forextended periods. If this happens,press the recirculation button againfor the outside air mode.

{ Caution

Driving with recirculation mode forprolonged period of time canmake you sleepy.

Periodically turn to the outside airmode for fresh air.

Air Conditioning SystemThe refrigeration unit of the airconditioning (A/C) system cools andremoves moisture, dust, and pollenfrom the air inside your vehicle.

Even with the A/C on, your vehiclewill produce warm air if you set thetemperature control knob to warm.

Note: You may notice water dripunder the engine compartmentsometimes after driving with A/C on.



This is normal because your coolingsystem removes the moisture fromthe air.

Note: Because the compressor ofthe cooling system shares theengine power, you may notice slightchange in engine power andperformance when the compressoroperates.

A/C button

Operated with the u button and isfunctional only when the engine andfan are running.

The air conditioning system coolsand dehumidifies (dries) as soon asthe outside temperature is slightlyabove the freezing point. Thereforecondensation may form and dripfrom under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required,switch the cooling system off tosave fuel.

{ Caution

Using your air conditioning (A/C)system while driving up long hillsor in heavy traffic can causeengine overheating.

Watch temperature gauge.

Turn OFF the A/C if the gaugeindicates engine overheating.

Vehicle can be damaged.

To turn on the airconditioning (A/C):

1. Start the engine.

2. Press A/C button. (Indicator lightwill come on to confirm the A/Cis running)

3. Adjust fan speed.

Note: The air conditioning will notoperate when the fan control knob isin the off position.

To turn off the A/C:

Press A/C button again. (Indicatorlight will go off to confirm the A/C isnot running)

Cooling

Maximum cooling

To achieve maximum cooling duringhot weather and when your vehiclehas been exposed to the sun for along time:

1. Open windows slightly to letwarm air escape.

2. Turn air conditioning (A/C) on.(Indicator illuminates)

3. Press recirculation button.(Indicator illuminates)



4. Turn air distribution knob toFRONT mode (Y).

5. Turn temperature control knoball the way to the blue area forcooling.

6. Turn fan control knob to highestspeed.

Normal cooling

1. Turn on the air conditioning(A/C) button. (Indicatorilluminates)


3. Turn the air distribution knob toFRONT (Y) or BI-LEVEL ()).

4. Turn temperature control knob toblue area for cooling.

5. Adjust the fan control knob tothe desired speed.

Heating

Maximum heating

Use the maximum heating mode forquick heating of the passengerarea. Do not use it for lengthyperiods because the interior air maybecome stale and the windows maymist up. To clear the windows, turnoff the recirculation button to allowfresh air into the vehicle.

For maximum heating:

1. Turn off air conditioning (A/C).(Indicator goes off)


3. Turn air distribution knob toBI-LEVEL ()) or FLOOR (6).

4. Turn temperature control knoball the way to the red area forheating.

5. Turn fan control knob tomaximum speed.

Normal heating


2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicatorgoes off)

3. Turn air distribution knob toFLOOR (6) or BI-LEVEL ()).

4. Turn temperature control knob tored area for heating.

5. Turn fan control knob to desiredspeed.

Ventilation

Bi-level

Use this setting on cool, butsunny days. Warmer air will flow intothe floor area and cool, outside airwill flow toward your upper body.

To use this setting:

1. Turn off recirculation button.(Indicator goes off)

2. Turn air distribution knob toBI-LEVEL ()).



3. Adjust temperature control knobto the desired temperature.

4. Turn fan control knob to thedesired speed.

Ventilation

To direct air through the centre andside vents:


2. Turn off recirculation. (Indicatorgoes off)

3. Turn the air distribution knob toFRONT (Y) or BI-LEVEL ()).

4. Turn temperature control knobto blue area for cooling.

5. Turn fan control knob to desiredspeed.

Defrosting and demisting

To defrost the windscreen:

1. Turn the air distribution knob toDEFROST (0).

2. Turn temperature control knob tored area for warm air.

3. Adjust the fan control knob tohighest speed for quickdefrosting.

Note: The A/C and outside airmode are automatically turned on toimprove the performance of thedefroster when you selectDEFROST (0) or FLOOR/Defrost

(-) mode.

To keep the windscreen clear anddirect warm air through floor, turnthe air distribution knob to FLOOR/DEFROST (-).

{ Caution

The difference between theoutside air and the temperature ofthe windscreen can cause thewindows to mist up, therebyrestricting your front vision.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not use FLOOR/DEFROST

(-) or DEFROST (0) inextremely humid weather whenthe temperature control knob isset to the blue area.

This can lead to an accidentwhich can damage your vehicleand cause personal injuries.

Automatic ClimateControl System

General description

Full automatic temperature control(FATC) system controls the interiortemperature in your vehicleautomatically and provides thegreatest amount of comfort in theinterior regardless of the weather,outside temperature or season.It will achieve the desiredtemperature when you select theAUTO mode.



The desired temperature iscontrolled by an in-car sensorsignal, coolant temperature, sunsensor signal and the ambient tempsensor signal.

Sunlight sensor

Sunlight sensor is located in front ofthe windscreen defroster vents.

This sensor detects sunlight whenoperating in AUTO mode.

{ Caution

Do not place stickers or otheritems over the sensor. Doing socould cause the sensor tomalfunction.

Temperature sensor

Temperature information sampledfrom the interior of your car is usedin establishing ventilation systemrequirements when operating inAUTO mode.

{ Caution

Do not place stickers over thetemperature sensor as this willimpair its function.



Automatic temperature control



1. Set temperature

2. Defroster indicator

3. Air distribution mode indicator

4. Air conditioning indicator

5. Outside temperature

6. Auto mode indicator

7. Outside air mode indicator

8. Recirculation mode indicator

9. Fan operation indicator

10. Fan speed indicator

11. Dual zone

When you operate your FATC inAUTO mode, the only thing youhave to do is just set the desiredtemperature to your preference.

AUTO button

When the AUTO button is pressed,the interior temperature will becontrolled automatically to reach thedesired preset temperature. Thesystem will control air distributionmode, fan speed, air conditioningand recirculation functionsautomatically.

AUTO mode indicator will appear inthe DIC (Driver Information Centre)located in the centre of theinstrument panel.

To set the desired temperature

Rotate the temperature control knobuntil the desired temperature isdisplayed.

Clockwise : The desiredtemperature will increase by 0.5°C(1°F).

Anti-clockwise : The desiredtemperature will decrease by 0.5°C(1°F).

You can set the desired temperatureat your preference between 18°Cand 28°C.



Note: When desired temperature isset at either "HI" (maximum) or "Lo"(minimum), the fan operatescontinuously at highest speed evenafter the interior temperaturereaches the preset temperature.

Dual Zone: The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driverand the passenger.

Adjust the SYNC dial to increase ordecrease the temperature for thepassenger.

Dual Zone/Single Zone display onthe DIC or the navigation screencan be switched by pressing theSYNC button each time.

Press the SYNC button during theDual Zone mode to link all climatesettings to the driver settings.

To turn off the system, press theOFF button.

Manual control

A/C button

Turns the air conditioning on or off.AUTO mode is cancelled andindicator will go off when this buttonis pressed.

The A/C indicator (#) will illuminatewhen the air conditioning is on.

Press the A/C button again to turnthe A/C off, or press the OFF buttonto turn the entire system off.



Air distribution mode change

If the MODE button is pressed,AUTO mode is cancelled and the airdistribution mode will be changed inthe following sequence.

FRONT(Y) → BI-LEVEL(\) →

FLOOR(5) → FLOOR/

DEFROST(/)

Recirculation mode button

Selects either outside air orrecirculated inside air.

Fan speed control knob

Adjust the fan speed by rotatingthis knob.

AUTO mode is cancelled when thisknob is rotated.



Defrosting

Press the DEFROST button (0) todefrost the windscreen. The A/Cand outside air mode areautomatically turned on.

Adjust the fan speed using fanspeed control knob.

This mode can be cancelled bypressing the defrost button again,air distribution mode knob or AUTObutton.

AQS

AQS (Air Quality Sensor)automatically draws outside air intothe passenger compartment orconverts air mode into recirculationmode to cut off the exhaust gasfrom the outside and preventcontaminating air within thepassenger compartment.

Press the AQS button to activateAQS mode. The indicator light onthe button will come on.

To turn off the AQS mode, press thebutton again. The indicator light willgo off to confirm the AQS is notactivated.

Your windows may mist up if youuse the AQS mode for extendedperiods. If this happens, turn off theAQS mode and turn to the outsideair mode.

Outside temperature display

The outside temperature is alwaysdisplayed in the DIC.



The temperature sensor is locatedin the front bumper area.

Due to its location, the displayedtemperature can be affected by roador engine heat while slow driving oridling.

Temperature unit change

To change the temperature unit, dothe followings:

1. Press SET button on the driverinformation centre for more than2 seconds. The temperature unitwill flash.

2. Press the Q or Q or R button tochange the temperature unit(°C↔° F).

Electronic ClimateControl System

\ : Press to change the directionof the airflow.

w ]x : Press to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Auxiliary HeaterThis supplementary heater (dieselonly) is an electrical air heating typeand installed in the air conditionermodule. This device improves theheating effect by increasing thetemperature of flowing air into thepassenger compartment.



Air Vents

Adjustable Air Vents

Side vents

You can direct air through bothadjustable side vents toward eitherside of the front passenger area,or toward the side windows.

Centre vents

You can control the direction ofairflow through both adjustablecentre vents.

To shut off the centre ventsand the side vents

Turn the wheel below or next toeach vent outlet to block the airflowthrough the vents.

{ Warning

Do not attach any objects to theslats of the air vents. Risk ofdamage and injury in case of anaccident.

Fixed Air Vents

Windscreen defroster vents

The windscreen defroster ventsdirect air onto the windscreen.

Floor vents

The floor vents direct air into thefront foot area.

Front door window defrostervents

The front door window defrostervents direct air onto the sidewindows, mainly in the area nearthe outside mirror.



Rear vents

Cooled or heated air travels to therear foot area through ductsunderneath the front seats.

Maintenance

Air IntakeThe air intake in front of thewindscreen in the enginecompartment must be kept clear toallow air intake.

Remove any leaves, dirt or snow.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter cleans dust, soot, pollen,spore from the air entering thevehicle through the air intake.

1. Remove the six screws fromaround the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box by gentlypulling at the bottom.



3. Remove the filter cover screw.

{ Caution

Your hands could be hurt bysharp materials around the filterhousing.

Be sure to wear protective gloveswhen replacing air conditionerfilter.

4. Replace the air conditioner filter.

Note: When inserting new filter,make sure they are inserted to thecorrect airflow.

Note: We recommend that youconsult an authorised repairer toreplace the filter.

{ Caution

More frequent maintenance of theair filter is required if the drivingcircumstances are dusty roads,air pollution areas, and frequentunpaved roads.

It makes the filter efficiency to bedecreased and the bronchus tobe bad effected.

Air Conditioning RegularOperationIn order to ensure continuouslyefficient performance, cooling mustbe operated for a few minutes oncea month, irrespective of the weatherand time of year. Operation withcooling is not possible when outsidetemperature is low.



ServiceFor optimal cooling performance, itis recommended to annually checkthe climate control system.. Functionality and pressure test. Heating functionality. Leakage check. Check of drive belts. Cleaning of condenser and. Evaporator drainage. Performance check

{ Caution

Use only correct refrigerant.

{ Warning

Climate control systems areserviced by qualified personnelonly. Improper service methodsmay cause personal injury.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationControl of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Run-In . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Automatic Engine Start/StopFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Diesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . . 9-7Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-8Transmission Display . . . . . . . . . 9-9Selector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Interruption of PowerSupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Manual GearboxManual Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

BrakesBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Ride Control SystemsElectronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-26Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

FuelFuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Fuel for Petrol Engines . . . . . . 9-32Fuel for Diesel Engines . . . . . . 9-32Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Driving Information

Control of a Vehicle

Never coast with engine notrunning

Many systems will not function inthis situation (e.g. brake servo unit,power steering). Driving in thismanner is a danger to yourself andothers.

Pedals

To ensure the pedal travel isuninhibited, there must be no matsin the area of the pedals.


9-2 Driving and Operating

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Run-InUse the following precautions forthe first few hundred kilometres(miles) to improve the performanceand economy of your vehicle andadd to its long life:. Avoid full-throttle starts.. Do not race the engine.. Avoid hard stops except in

emergencies. This will allowyour brakes to bed in properly.

. Avoid quick starts, suddenaccelerations, and prolongedhigh-speed driving in order toavoid damage to the engine andto conserve fuel.

Avoid full-throttle acceleration inlow gear.

. Do not tow any other vehicle.

Ignition Positions

Type 1

LOCK: Ignition off

ACC: Ignition off, steering wheellock released

ON: Ignition on, preheating fordiesel engine

START: Starting

{ Danger

Do not turn the key to LOCK orACC position while driving.

Vehicle and brake assistancewould not operate, causingvehicle damage, personal injuryor possibly death.

{ Caution

Do not leave the key in ACC orON position for extended periodswhile the engine is not running.

This will discharge the battery.



Type 2

The ignition control knob can beturned to four different positions.

1. LOCK(Off): Ignition off

2. ACC: Ignition off, steering wheellock released

3. ON: Ignition on, preheating fordiesel engine

4. START: Starting

Starting the Engine

Starting engine with theignition switch. Turn the key to position ACC,

move the steering wheel slightlyto release the steeringwheel lock.

. Manual gearbox: Operate clutch.

. Automatic transmission : Movegear lever to P or N.

. Do not accelerate.

. Diesel engine: turn the key toposition ON for preheating untilK goes out.

. Turn the key to position START,depressing the clutch pedal andbrake pedal then release whenengine is running.

Before restarting or to switch off theengine, turn key back to LOCK.

{ Caution

Do not operate starter motor formore than 10 seconds at a time.

If the engine does not start, wait10 seconds before trying again.

This will prevent starter motordamage.

Starting engine with theignition control knob. Manual gearbox: Operate clutch.

Turn the ignition control knob tothe START position, depressingthe clutch pedal and brake pedalthen release when engine isrunning.



. Automatic transmission: Movethe shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will notstart in any other position. Torestart the engine when thevehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, your foot mustbe on the brake pedal to startthe engine.

. Diesel engine: Turn the ignitioncontrol knob to the ON positionfor preheating until K goes out.

Turn the ignition control knob to theSTART position.

When the engine begins cranking,let go of the ignition control knob, itwill return to the ON position.

If ignition control knob does not turn,try pushing the knob in and turningagain.

If the transmitter is not in the vehicleor something is interfering with thetransmitter, the Driver Information

Centre (DIC) in the middle of thecluster will display ELECTRONICKEY NOT DETECTED.

Automatic Engine Start/Stop Feature

Stop-Start System

The stop-start system helps to savefuel and to reduce the exhaustemission. The engine turns offautomatically when the vehicle is atlow speed or standstill.

The engine will restart automaticallyas soon as the clutch is depressed.

Activation

The stop-start system is activatedas soon as ignition is ON.

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start systemmanually by pressing the ecobutton.

The deactivation is indicated by theLED in the button going off.

Automatic Engine Stop

If the vehicle is at low speed or instandstill, activate the automaticengine stop as follows:. Shift the gear lever to N. Release the clutch pedal



The engine will be turned off whilethe ignition ON.

The engine stop is indicated by theneedle on the AUTOSTOP positionin the tachometer.

During an automatic engine stop,the heating performance, powersteering and brake performance willmaintain.

Air conditioning system may or maynot inhibit the stop and start systemaccording to the coolingperformance.

Conditions for an automaticengine stop. The stop-start system is not

manually deactivated. The bonnet is fully closed. The driver's door is closed or the

driver's seat belt is fastened. The battery is sufficiently

charged and in good condition. The engine is warmed up. The engine coolant temperature

is not too low. The ambient temperature is not

too low or high. The defrosting function is not

activated. Fan control knob of manual

climate control is not in step 4(max airflow)

. A/C button of automatic climatecontrol is not pressed

. The brake vacuum is sufficient

. The vehicle has moved since thelast automatic engine stop

Restart of the engine by thedriver

Depress the clutch pedal to restartthe engine.

The engine start is indicated by theneedle on the idle speed position inthe tachometer.

If the gear lever is shifted out of Nbefore depressing the clutch first,# illuminates.

The light goes out as soon as theclutch pedal is depressed.

Restart of the engine by thestop-start system

If one of the following conditionsoccurs during engine stop, theengine will be restartedautomatically by the stop-startsystem.. The stop-start system is

manually deactivated. The bonnet is opened



. The driver's seat belt isunfastened and the driver's dooris opened

. The engine temperature istoo low

. The battery is low

. The brake vacuum is notsufficient

. The vehicle starts to move

. The ambient temperature is toolow or high

. The defrosting function isactivated

. Fan control knob of manualclimate control is in step 4 (maxairflow)

. A/C button of automatic climatecontrol is pressed

Parking. Do not park the vehicle on an

easily ignitable surface. The hightemperature of the exhaustsystem could ignite the surface.

. Always apply parking brake.

. Switch off the engine andignition. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lockengages.

. If the vehicle is on a levelsurface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or p position beforeswitching off the ignition. On anuphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gearbefore switching off the ignition.Turn the front wheels towardsthe kerb.

. Close windows.

. Lock the vehicle and activate theanti-theft alarm system.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or exhaust pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detectedor if it is suspected thatexhaust is coming into thevehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle withthe engine running in anenclosed area such as agarage or a building that hasno fresh air ventilation.

Diesel Particulate FilterThe diesel particle filter systemfilters harmful soot particles out ofthe exhaust gases. The systemincludes a self-cleaning function thatruns automatically during driving.The filter is cleaned by burning offthe soot particles at hightemperature. This process takesplace automatically under setdriving conditions and may takemore than 15 minutes. The emissionof smells and smoke during thisprocess is normal.

Under certain driving conditions,e.g. short distances, the systemcannot clean itself automatically.

If the control indicator (DPF lamps)L illuminates or flashes, it isnecessary to activate the cleaningprocess of Diesel Particulate Filterby continuing driving safely untilDPF lamps off at the cluster. Incase, constant driving will be betterfor cleaning process.

{ Warning

Be sure the following precautionsare taken because the exhaustparts are raised to hightemperature during regenerationof DPF.

. Things that can burn couldtouch hot exhaust parts underyour vehicle and ignite. Donot place your vehicle overpapers, leaves, dry grass orother things that can burn.

. Turn the ignition OFF as soonas your vehicle enters agarage.

. Do not go near the hotexhaust parts includingexhaust tail pipe.



Catalytic ConverterThe catalytic converter reduces theamount of harmful substances in theexhaust gas.

{ Caution

Use of fuel with low quality or toolow octane number may damagethe engine, the catalytic converteror electronic components.

Unburnt petrol will overheat anddamage the catalytic converter.Therefore avoid excessive use ofthe starter, running the fuel tankdry and starting the engine bypushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, unevenengine running, a reduction inengine performance or otherunusual problems, have the causeof the fault rectified by a repairer assoon as possible. In an emergency,

driving can be continued for a shortperiod, keeping vehicle speed andengine speed low.

{ Caution

Don't touch the catalytic converterduring engine operating and itcan be possible to touch thecatalytic converter after coolingdown the catalytic converterbecause the catalytic converter isvery hot so the skin (i.e. hand orbody) can be burned: coolingdown condition - cool down overtwo hours under ambienttemperature after engine stop.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission permitsmanual gear shifting (manual mode)or automatic gear shifting(automatic mode).

The automatic transmission is anelectronically controlled six-speedtransmission.

Sixth gear is overdrive.

Starting the vehicle

1. After warming up the engine,continue to press the brakepedal while shifting the gearlever to either the R, D position.

{ Caution

Do not shift between D (Drive)and R (Reverse) or P (Park) whilethe vehicle is moving.

This will cause damage to yourtransmission and personal injury.



2. Release the parking brake andthe brake pedal.

3. Slowly press the acceleratorpedal to set the vehicle inmotion.

Transmission Display

Type 1

It is located in the instrumentcluster.

It indicates the selected gear ortransmission mode.

Type 2

If your vehicle has a DIC in themiddle of the cluster, the selectedgear or transmission mode displaywill be shown on the bottom ofthe DIC.

Selector Lever

P (PARK): Locks the front wheels.Select P only when the vehicle isstationary and the parking brake isapplied.

R (REVERSE): Reversetransmission position. Select R onlywhen the vehicle is stationary.

N (NEUTRAL): Neutral gearposition.



D: This drive position is for allnormal driving conditions. Allowsthe transmission to shift into all 6forward gears.

{ Caution

Do not accelerate while engaginga gear.

Never depress the acceleratorpedal and brake pedal at thesame time.

When a gear is engaged, thevehicle slowly begins to creepwhen the brake is released.

Do not use the P (Park) positionin place of the parking brake.

Turn off the engine, apply theparking brake, and remove theignition key when leaving thevehicle.

Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine isrunning.

Shifting between gearpositions

Shifting between gear positions isas follows:

Depress the brake pedal and pushrelease button to shift.

Shifts that require you to push therelease button are indicated byblack arrows.

Push the release button to shift.

White arrows indicate shifts that donot require you to push the releasebutton.

Shift freely.

Whether your vehicle is stationaryor in motion, manual mode isselected by pulling the gear leverfrom the "D" position to the left into



the manual gate. To return to "D"range operation, push the gear leverback to the right into the main gate.

In manual mode, moving the gearlever backwards and forwards canmake rapid gearshifts simple. Incontrast to a manual transaxle, themanual mode allows gearshifts withthe accelerator pedal depressed.

UP(+): Push the lever forward onceto shift up one gear.

DOWN(-): Pull the lever backwardsonce to shift down one gear.

Note: In manual mode, only the fiveforward gears can be selected.

To reverse or park the vehicle, movethe gear lever to the "R" or "P"position as required.

Note: In manual mode, downwardshifts are made automatically whenthe vehicle slows down. When thevehicle stops, 1st gear isautomatically selected.

To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety, thesystem may not execute certaingearshifts when the gear lever isoperated.

Before driving away from a stop ona slippery road, push the gear leverforward into the +(up) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into2nd gear which is better for smoothdriving away on a slippery road. Pullthe gear lever to the - (down) to shiftback to 1st gear.

{ Caution

In manual mode, the driver mustexecute upward shifts inaccordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keepthe engine speed below thered zone.

Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause aloss of traction, however,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

downshifts must be madecarefully in accordance with thevehicle's speed.

Engine braking

To help use the braking effect ofengine compression when drivingon a long downhill select manualmode downshift to a lower gear in asequential order.

{ Warning

Do not downshift transmission bytwo or more gear positions ata time.

This prevents damage to yourtransmission or loss of controland personal injuries.

Note: Use of engine compressionduring long mountainous descentsmay prolong the life of your brakes.



Rocking the vehicle

Rocking the vehicle is onlypermissible if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud or snow.

Move the gear lever between D andR in a repeat pattern.

Do not race the engine and avoidsudden acceleration.

Parking

After stop the vehicle with pressingthe brake pedal, engage P andapply the parking brake and thenremove ignition key.

Kickdown

For faster acceleration press theaccelerator pedal all the way downand hold. The transmission shifts toa lower gear depending on theengine speed.

FaultIn the event of a fault, themalfunction indicator lightilluminates. The transmission nolonger shifts automatically normanually because it is locked in acertain gear.


Interruption of PowerSupplyIn the event of an interruption ofpower supply, the gear lever cannotbe moved out of the P position.

If the battery is discharged, start thevehicle using jump leads.

If the battery is not the cause of thefault, release gear lever and removeignition key from ignition lock.

Release gear lever

Before shifting from park (P), theignition must be ON and you mustdepress the brake pedal all the waydown. If you cannot shift out of Pwith the ignition ON and the brakepedal depressed:

1. Turn the ignition off and removethe key.

2. Depress and hold the brakepedal and apply the parkingbrake.



3. Remove the rubber mat.

4. Insert and press the ignition keyinto the slot.

5. Shift to neutral (N).

6. Remove the key from the slot.

7. Reinstall the rubber mat.

8. Have your vehicle repaired assoon as possible.

{ Warning

To help prevent damage to thetransmission, observe thefollowing precautions:

Do not press the acceleratorpedal while shifting from P or N toR or a forward gear.

To do so may not only damagethe transmission, but could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle.

Use D as much as possible.

Never shift to P or R while thevehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

When stopping the vehicle on anuphill gradient, do not hold thevehicle in place by pressing theaccelerator pedal. Use the footbrake.

Press the brake pedal whenshifting from P or N to R or aforward gear.

Otherwise transmission could bedamaged or vehicle could moveunexpectedly, causing driver tolose control of the vehicle,resulting in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle or otherproperty.



Fuel Economy Mode

The vehicle may have a fueleconomy mode. When engaged,fuel economy mode can improve thevehicle's fuel economy.

Pressing the eco button by the shiftlever will engage fuel economymode. When activated, the eco lightin the instrument cluster willcome on.

See Fuel Economy Light onpage 5-24. Pressing the button asecond time will turn fuel economymode off.

When fuel economy mode is on:. The transmission will up shift

sooner, and downshift later.. The torque converter will lock-

up sooner, and stay on longer.. The accelerator pedal will be

less sensitive.. The vehicle's computers will

more aggressively shut off fuelto the engine under deceleration.Do not use fuel economy modewhile towing.

Manual Gearbox

To change gears, fully depress theclutch pedal, move the gear leverinto gear, and slowly release theclutch.

To shift into reverse, press thebutton on the back of the gear leverknob while moving the gear leverinto the reverse position.

Do not ride the clutch unnecessarily.During operation, depress the clutchpedal completely.

Do not use the pedal as a foot rest.



{ Caution

It is inadvisable to drive with ahand resting on the gear lever.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has active ondemand all-wheel drive (AWD), theAWD system operates automaticallywithout any action required by thedriver. If the front drive wheels beginto slip, the rear wheels willautomatically begin to drive thevehicle as required. There may be aslight engagement noise during harduse but this is normal.

The AWD warning light C flasheswhen AWD system is temporarilydisabled. If the light flashes briefly,and then goes out, this is normaland does not indicate a systemfault. However if the light flashescontinuously, you should consult arepairer to repair the problem assoon as possible.

The light comes on to indicate thatthere is a malfunction in the AWDsystem. If it happens, your vehicleshould be serviced by a repairer.

BrakesThe braking system is designed forbraking performance under a widerange of driving conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear disc brakes and a dualcircuit braking system.

If one brake circuit should fail, thevehicle can still be stopped with theremaining circuit, however, stoppingdistance will be increased and morebrake pedal pressure will berequired.

{ Warning

If one of the circuits fail, the brakepedal must be pressed withgreater pedal pressure and thebraking distance is increased.

Have the brake system checkedand repaired by a repairerimmediately.



{ Warning

If the brake pedal can be pressedfurther than normal, the brakesmay be in need of repair.

Consult a repairer immediately.

{ Caution

Do not drive with your foot restingon the brake pedal.

Doing so will accelerate wear ofthe brake components. Thebrakes may also becomeoverheated, resulting in longerbraking distance and an unsafecondition.

Centre high-mounted brake lamp (orwith brake lamps) flashes severaltimes to alert drivers coming behindyour vehicle on the followingcondition:

‐ Although brakes are operated, avehicle runs more than a certainspeed.

‐ When ABS is working atthat time.

Wet brakes

Driving through water or washingyour car can get the brakecomponents wet.

To restore normal braking:

1. Check behind you for othervehicles.

2. Keep a safe forward speed withplenty of space to your rear andsides.

3. Gently apply brakes until normalperformance is restored.

Overheated brakes

Braking excessively when goingdown a long, steep hill cantemporarily overheat the brakes.Shift to a lower gear when goingdown hills. Do not continuouslyapply the brakes.

{ Warning

After driving through deep water,washing the vehicle, or using thebrakes excessively when goingdown a steep hill, the brakes cantemporarily lose their stoppingpower. This may be due to wetbrake components oroverheating.

If your brakes temporarily losetheir stopping power because ofoverheating:

Shift to a lower gear when goingdown hills. Do not continuouslyapply the brakes.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

If your brakes temporarily losetheir power because of wet brakecomponents, the followingprocedure will help restore theirnormal performance:

1. Check behind you for othervehicles.

2. Keep a safe forward speedwith plenty of space to yourrear and sides.

3. Gently apply the brakes untilnormal performance isrestored.

{ Warning

When brake noise is heard, donot continue to drive your vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

This may indicate the brake padsneed to be repaired or replaced.Driving with worn brake padscould result in a collision andpersonal injury.

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Anti-lock brake system (ABS)prevents the wheels from locking.

ABS starts to regulate brakepressure as soon as a wheel showsa tendency to lock. The vehicleremains steerable, even during hardbraking.

ABS control is made apparentthrough a pulse in the brake pedaland the noise of the regulationprocess.

For optimum braking, keep thebrake pedal fully depressedthroughout the braking process,

despite the fact that the pedal ispulsating. Do not reduce thepressure on the pedal.

ABS operation can be recognisedby vibration and the noise of theABS process.

To stop the vehicle optimally, keeppressing the brake pedal even if thebrake pedal vibrates.

Do not decrease your power whenpressing the brake pedal.

When you start the vehicle afterignition is switched on, you mayhear mechanical sounds. This isnormal so that the ABS is ready.

See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5-21

Fault

{ Warning

If there is a fault in the ABS, thewheels may be liable to lock dueto braking that is heavier than

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

normal. The advantages of ABSare no longer available. Duringhard braking, the vehicle can nolonger be steered and mayswerve.


Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the centre console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is OFF. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB system when theengine is not running.

The system has a parking brakestatus lightY and a parking brakewarning light.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-20. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released. Before leavingthe vehicle, check the parking brakestatus lamp to insure the parkingbrake is applied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status lightYwill be on. While the brake is beingapplied, the status lamp will flashuntil full apply is reached. If the lightdoes not come on or remainsflashing, you need to have thevehicle serviced. Do not drive thevehicle if the parking brake statuslight is flashing. Consult a repairer.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-20.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound. The vehicle will decelerateas long as the switch is held in theup position. Releasing the EPBswitch during the deceleration willrelease the parking brake. If theswitch is held in the up position untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.



If the parking brake status lightYflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.If this light flashes continuously,release the EPB, and attempt toapply it again. If this light continuesto flash, do not drive the vehicle.Consult a repairer. If the parkingbrake warning light is on, the EPBhas detected an error in anothersystem and is operating withreduced functionality. To apply theEPB when this light is on, lift up onthe EPB switch and hold it in the upposition. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.

Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status lightYremains on. If the parking brakewarning light is on, consult arepairer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ON/START position,apply and hold the brake pedal, andpush down momentarily on the EPBswitch. If you attempt to release theEPB without the brake pedalapplied, a chime will sound and thepress brake pedal light# willappear.

The EPB is released when theparking brake status lightY is off.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. Torelease the EPB when this light ison, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.

EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal when thislight is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslightY is off. If the light is on,consult a repairer.

Note: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause premature wearor damage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brake isfully released and the brake warninglight is off before driving.



Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

{ Warning

If the parking brake is not setproperly, the vehicle may movesuddenly. See a repairer if anadjustment is required.

{ Caution

Do not drive with the parkingbrake on.

This can cause your rear parkingbrakes to overheat or wear outprematurely. You may have toreplace them, and you coulddamage other parts of yourvehicle.

{ Caution

Do not park or operate yourvehicle over combustiblematerials.

They could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle andignite.

Ride Control Systems

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)

{ Caution

If you choose to install wintertyres on your vehicle, be sure toonly use winter tyres that arerecommended by a repairer.

Using the wrong winter tyres mayadversely affect Stability Systemperformance.

See authorised repairer for detailsregarding winter tyre availabilityand proper tyre selection.

The ESC system is an electronicvehicle stability control system anddriving safety supplementary systemthat helps to avoid dangeroussituations by applying brakes on thewheels or the engine torque tocompensate vehicle stability when itis extremely unstable under



conditions such as sharp corneringor quick lane change. The ESCfunction automatically works whenyour vehicle is in a very unstablecondition. The ESC system doesnot work under normal drivingconditions.

When the ignition is switched ON,the ESC active & warning lamp andESC off indicator come on and gooff after about 4 seconds.

The ESC active & warning lampflashes while ESC is operating andilluminates to indicate that there is amalfunction in the system. If thiscondition occurs, consult a repaireras soon as possible.

See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Light on page 5-22.

{ Caution

If the ESC active & warning lampcomes on, the ESC system isdefective. Make sure to consult arepairer as soon as possible.

Hydraulic brake assist (HBA)function

When the ESC system recognisesany emergency situations requiringhard braking, it automaticallydelivers an extra high brakingpressure to the wheels.

Active rollover protection(ARP) function

This function is a part of the ESCsystem. When your vehicle movesin an extremely unstable manner,this function helps the vehiclemaintain normal stability.

Traction control system (TCS)function

TCS prevents the driving wheelsfrom spinning, irrespective of theroad condition and tyre grip. Assoon as at least one driving wheelstarts to spin, the engine output isreduced and the spinning wheel isbraked. This improves the vehicle'sdirectional control and drivingpower, particularly on snow and iceas well as on wet or slippery roads.

Trailer stability assist (TSA)function

Snaking road trains are very difficultto handle. This function detectssnaking and then reduces the trainsvelocity until the oscillation stops.The deceleration is obtained byreducing the engine torque andincreasing the pressure in all wheelbrakes.

Hill start assist (HSA)

The system helps prevent rollbackwhen driving away on hill.

When depressing the acceleratorpedal after releasing the brakepedal on hill, the brakes remain onfor approximately 2 seconds.



ESC off button

ESC can be deactivated by pressingthe ESC OFF button on the centreof the instrument panel.

If you push the ESC OFF buttonagain when the ESC function isdeactivated (ESC off indicator isturned on), the system will beresumed and the ESC off indicatoron the instrument panel goes out byresuming the ESC system.

{ Caution

When the ESC system activatesto correct the vehicle stability,reduce the speed and pay extraattention to the road.

The ESC system is only asupplementary device for thevehicle. When the vehicleexceeds its physical limits, itcannot be controlled. Do not relyon the system. Keep drivingsafely.

When the ESC is applied, youmay hear some noise or feel avibration from the brake pedal orother relevant systems. They arecaused by pressure changes inthe relevant systems.

Descent control system (DCS)

When travelling down steepgradients, this function allows you totravel at a low speed withoutdepressing the brake pedal andallows you to concentrate onsteering. This convenient function isfor only driving down steepgradients.

To activate DCS, press the DCSbutton on the centre of theinstrument panel. When the buttonis pressed, DCS is ready for use.



The green DCS active indicatorcomes on. While DCS is operating,DCS active indicator will flash.

To deactivate DCS, press the DCSbutton again. DCS active indicatorwill go off.

The amber DCS not ready &warning lamp flashes to indicatethat DCS is not ready for conditionsto operate and comes on to indicatethat there is a malfunction in thesystem.

See Descent Control System Lighton page 5-21.

{ Caution

If the amber DCS not ready andwarning lamp comes on, the DCSis malfunctioning. Make sure toconsult a repairer as soon aspossible.

DCS operational conditions

1. The DCS button should bepressed (The green DCS activeindicator comes on).

2. A certain steep gradient.

3. Driving below about 50 km/h(31.1 mph).

(DCS is not operated when thevehicle speed is over 50 km/h(31.1 mph) in spite of pressingDCS button. DCS operatesagain when the vehicle speeddecreases below 30 km/h(18.6 mph) after it is over50 km/h (31.1 mph))

4. The accelerator or brake pedalis not depressed.

(DCS is not operated only whenthe accelerator or brake pedal isapplied.)

{ Caution

DCS is designed for driving onoff-road steep gradients.

Unnecessary usage of DCS cancause malfunctions in the brakesystem or ESC. Do not use DCSwhen driving on normal roads.

It is normal to have strongvibrations and noise from thebrake system when DCS isapplied.



Cruise Control

If your vehicle has cruise control,you can maintain a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. This can really help onlong trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about40 km/h (25 mph).

When you apply your brakes orpress the Q button, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

If your vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the optional traction controlsystem begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, youmay turn the cruise control back on.

{ Caution

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you can't drive safely at asteady speed. So, don't use yourcruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tyre traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Don't usecruise control on slippery roads.

Setting cruise control

1. Press theI button, located onthe right side of the steeringwheel, to turn cruise control on.

2. Accelerate to the speedyou want.

3. Press the SET/- button andrelease it. An indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster willcome on to show you that thecruise control is on.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

{ Caution

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you're not using cruise, youmight hit a button and go intocruise when you don't want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

Resuming a set speed

Suppose you set your cruise controlat a desired speed and then youapply the brake pedal or press theI button. This, of course, shuts off



the cruise control. But you don'tneed to reset it. Once you're goingabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,you can tap the RES/+ button.

You'll go right back up to yourchosen speed and stay there.

If you hold the RES/+ button longer,the vehicle will keep going fasteruntil you release the button, applythe brake pedal or press theIbutton. So unless you want to gofaster, do not hold the RES/+button.

Increasing speed while usingcruse control

There are two ways to go to ahigher speed:. Use the accelerator pedal to get

to a higher speed. Press theSET/- button, then release thebutton and the accelerator pedal.You will now cruise at the higherspeed.

. Press the RES/+ button. Hold itthere until you get up to thespeed you want, and thenrelease the button. To increaseyour speed in very smallamounts, tap the RES/+ buttonand then release it. Each timeyou do this, your vehicle will goabout 2 km/h (1.2 mph) faster.The accelerate feature will onlywork after you turn on the cruisecontrol by pressing the SET/-button.

Reducing speed while usingcruise control

There are two ways to reduce yourspeed while using cruise control:. Press the SET/- button until you

reach the lower speed you want,then release it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/- button.Each time you do this, you willgo about 2 km/h (1.2 mph)slower.

Passing another vehicle whileusing cruise control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease your speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruisecontrol speed you set earlier.

Using cruise control on hills

How well your cruise control willwork on hills depends upon yourspeed, load and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up a steep hill,you may have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lowergear to keep your speed down. Ofcourse, applying the brake pedaltakes you out of cruise control.Many drivers find this to be toomuch trouble and don't use cruisecontrol on steep hills.



Disengaging cruise control

There are several ways to turn offthe cruise control:. Step lightly on the brake pedal

or press theI button, or pressthe clutch pedal, if you have amanual transaxle.

. Press theI button on thecruise control pad.

Erasing speed memory

When you turn off the cruise controlor the ignition, your cruise controlset speed memory is erased.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking Assist

Front and rear parking assist

The parking assistance systemassists the driver during forward andbackward movement of the vehicleby alarming if any object is sensedbetween the vehicle and theobstacle.

The system registers distance usingsensors in each of the front and rearbumpers.

This system is automatically turnedon whenever the ignition switchis ON.

Note: The front and rear sensorsare activated together when shiftingthe gear to "R" position.

If the shifting lever is not in "R"position, only front sensor isactivated.

If the vehicle approaches anobstacle to the front or rear, a seriesof signals sound. The intervalbetween the signals becomesshorter as the distance is reduced.

The system is deactivated when thevehicle's speed is greater than25 km/h (15 mph).

To activate the system, press thepark assist button on the instrumentpanel. The indicator button willlight up.



Pressing the button againdeactivates the system and theindicator light turns off.

Rear parking assists system

The parking assistance systemassists the driver during backwardmovement of the vehicle byalarming if any object is sensedbehind the vehicle.

This system can automatically beturned on whenever the ignitionswitch is ON and the automatictransaxle's gear lever is in "R".

This system is deactivated when thevehicle's speed is greater thanapproximately 25 km/h (15 mph).

If the alarm sound happens whenshifting the gear to "R" position, thisindicates normal condition.

Warning sound

You can figure out the distancebetween your vehicle and obstacleswith the warning sound.



Front warning type

Warning zone Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3

Warning range 100~81 cm 80~41 cm 40 cm~

Warning sound beep—beep—beep beep-beep-beep continuous

Rear warning type

Warning zone Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3

Warning range 120~81 cm 80~41 cm 40 cm~

Warning sound gong—gong—gong gong-gong-gong continuous

Note: The parking assistancesystem warning light can come onto indicate that the sensors are dirty.

If the warning light is on due to thesensors being dirty, clean thesensors with a soft sponge andclean water.

If the warning light is still on aftercleaning the sensors, consult yourdealer to repair the problem as soonas possible.

{ Caution

If the following happens, thisindicates that there is amalfunction in the parkingassistance system. Consult arepairer as soon as possible.

. The parking assistancesystem warning lamp comeson while driving.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. The alarm sounds for 6 timesrepeatedly when there are noobstacles around the rearbumper.



{ Caution

Parking assistance system shouldonly be considered as asupplementary function. Thedriver must check the view.

The audible warning signal canbe different depending on theobjects.

The audible warning signal mightnot activate in case the sensor isfrozen or stained with dirt or mud.

There is a chance of malfunctionof the parking assistance systemwhen driving on uneven surfacessuch as woods, gravel road,jagged road, or gradient.

Do not push, or scratch thesurface of the sensor. This willlikely damage the covering.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

The parking assistance systemmight not recognise sharpobjects, thick winter clothes orsponges which absorb thefrequency.

When receiving other ultrasonicsignals (metal sound or airbraking noises from heavycommercial vehicles), the parkingassistance system may not workproperly.

Clean dirty sensors with a softsponge and clean water.

You should continue to utilise themirrors or turning your head.Normal precautions whenreversing should be maintained.

Do not press or shock thesensors by hitting or directing ahigh pressure water gun directlyat them while washing, or thesensors will be damaged.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

In the car park, the upper portionof the vehicle can be hit beforethe sensor operation, so checkwith outside rearview mirrors orby turning your head duringparking.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The RVC system is designed tohelp the driver when reversing bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle. When the key is in theON/START position and the drivershifts the vehicle into R (Reverse),the video image automaticallyappears on the LCD ModuleDisplay.

Once the driver shifts out ofR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically disappears from theLCD Module Display.



{ Warning

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision.

RVC does not:. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not reverse the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing manoeuvres orwhere there could be cross-traffic.You're judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore reversing, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before reversing bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Turning the rear vision

Camera System Off or On When thekey is in the ON/START positionand the driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video image willappear when the CAM button ispressed on the infotainment system.

Rear vision camera location

The camera is located in the rear ofthe vehicle.

The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corner orunder the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.



When the system does not seemto work properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off.. It is dark.. The sun or the beam of

headlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.

Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

Fuel

Fuel AdditivesPetrol should contain detergentadditives that help prevent engineand fuel system deposits fromforming. Clean fuel injectors andintake valves will allow the emissioncontrol system to work properly.Some petrol does not containsufficient quantities of additive tokeep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean. To make up for this lack ofdetergent, it is recommended thatGM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS(ACDelco part No. 88861013)be added to the fuel tank at everyengine oil change or every15,000 km, whichever occurs first.

Petrols containing oxygenates, suchas ethers and ethanol, may beavailable in your area. However,fuels containing more than 15%ethanol, such as E85 (85% ethanol),or more than 15% MTBE (an ether)should not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some petrols can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy petrol whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such petrols.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Fuel for Petrol Engines

Fuel recommendations

Use only unleaded fuel rated atRON95.

Fuel quality and additives containedin fuel have a significant effect onpower output, drive ability, and lifeof the engine.

Fuel with too low an octane numbercan cause engine knock.

{ Caution

Use of fuel with an octanenumber lower than RON95 maydamage engine. (In somecountries, you may be able to useunleaded fuel rated at RON91.For the details, consult anauthorised repairer.)

Use of leaded fuel will damageexhaust system and invalidate thewarranty.

Note: To prevent accidental use ofleaded fuel, the nozzles for leadedfuel are larger, and will not fit thefuel filler neck of your vehicle.

Do not use methanol.

Fuels containing methanol shouldnot be used in your vehicle.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicleperformance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

{ Caution

Use of methanol may damage thefuel system. Such misuse is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

Operation in foreign countries Ifyou are going to drive yourvehicle in another country:

Observe all regulations regardingregistration and insurance.

Confirm that suitable fuel isavailable.

Fuel for Diesel EnginesDiesel engine must be operatedonly on commercially availablediesel fuel meeting thespecifications of DIN EN 590. Donot use marine diesel oils, heatingoils or entirely or partiallyplant-based diesel fuels, such asrape seed oil or bio-diesel,Aquazole and similar diesel-wateremulsions.

The flow and filterability of dieselfuel are temperature-dependent.

Diesel fuels with improvedlow-temperature properties aretherefore available on the marketduring the winter months. Make surethat you fill the tank with winter fuelbefore the start of the cold weatherseason.



Filling the Tank

{ Caution

If you use inappropriate gradefuel or put incorrect fuel additivesinto the fuel tank, the engine andcatalytic converter may seriouslybe damaged.

Be sure to use the correct fuel(petrol or diesel) corresponding toyour vehicle when refuelling.If you fill petrol in your dieselpowered vehicle, your vehicle canbe seriously damaged. If youvehicle has diesel engine, youcan confirm the correct fuel bytaking a look at information on thefuel filler cap.

For safety reasons, fuelcontainers, pumps and hosesmust be properly earthed. Staticelectricity build up can ignite thepetrol vapour. You can be burntand your vehicle damaged.

{ Danger

Before refuelling, switch offengine and any external heaterswith combustion chambers.Switch off any mobile phone.

Vapourised fuel can be ignited byelectromagnetic waves or electriccurrent of mobile phone.

Fuel is flammable and explosive.No smoking. No naked flames orsparks. Follow the operating andsafety instructions of the fillingstation when refuelling.

Remove static electricity on yourhands by touching somethingable to release the staticelectricity before touching oropening fuel cap or refuellingnozzle.

(Continued)

Danger (Continued)

Do not perform any actions thatmay generate static electricity likegetting on and off the vehiclewhen refuelling. Vapourised fuelcan be ignited by static electricity.

If you can smell fuel in yourvehicle, have the cause of thisremedied immediately by arepairer.



The fuel filler door is in the left rearside of vehicle.

1. Stop the engine.

2. Unlock the doors by pressing thedoor lock switch on the driver'sdoor trim pad.

3. Open the fuel filler door.

4. Turn the fuel filler capanticlockwise slowly. If a hissingsound is heard, wait for it to stopbefore completely unscrewingthe cap.

5. Remove the cap. The cap istethered to the hinge hook.

6. After refuelling, close cap. Turn itclockwise until you hear "click"sound.

7. Push the fuel filler door closeduntil it latches.

Note: If, in cold weather, the fuelfiller door does not open, tap thedoor lightly. Then try to open itagain.

{ Caution

Wipe off any overflowing fuelimmediately.

Fuel Consumption –CO2-Emissions

Petrol and Diesel engines

The fuel consumption (combined) ofthe model Trax is within a range of5.3 to 14.3 l/100 km.

The CO2 emission (combined) iswithin a range of 164 to 244 g/km.

For the values specific for yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificateof Conformity provided with yourvehicle or other national registrationdocuments.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2End-of-Life VehicleRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Manual Gearbox Fluid . . . . . . 10-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-19Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Diesel Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Headlamps and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Front Indicator Lamps . . . . . . 10-27Tail lamps, Indicator, Brakelamps, and ReversingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Side Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . 10-28Centre High-Mounted Brakelamp (CHMBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Rear Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Number Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-28Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Electrical SystemFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Vehicle ToolsTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Wheels and TyresWheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Winter Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tyre Designations . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tyre Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Tread Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tyre Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Different Size Tyres andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Wheel Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Wheel Alignment and TyreBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Tyre Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tyre Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tyre Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62


10-2 Vehicle Care

General Information

Accessories andModificationsWe recommend to use genuineparts and accessories and factoryapproved parts specific for yourvehicle type. We cannot assess orguarantee reliability of otherproducts - even if they have aregulatory or otherwise grantedapproval.

Do not make any modifications tothe electrical system, e.g. changesof electronic control units (chiptuning).

{ Caution

Never modify your vehicle. It mayaffect the performance, durabilityand safety of the vehicle and thewarrant may not cover anyproblems caused by themodification.

Vehicle Storage

Storage for a long periodof time

If the vehicle is to be stored forseveral months:. Wash and wax the vehicle.. Have the wax in the engine

compartment and underbodychecked.

. Clean and preserve rubberseals.

. Change engine oil.

. Drain washer fluid reservoir.

. Check coolant anti-freeze andcorrosion protection.

. Adjust tyre pressure to the valuespecified for full load.

. Park the vehicle in a dry, wellventilated place. For manualgearbox, engage first or reversegear. For automatictransmission, engine P position.Prevent the vehicle from rolling.

. Do not apply the parking brake.

. Open the bonnet, close all doorsand lock the vehicle.

. Disconnect the clamp from thenegative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Beware that all systemsare not functional, e.g. anti-theftalarm system.

. Close the bonnet.

Putting back into operation

When the vehicle is to be put backinto operation:. Connect the clamp to the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Activate the electronicsof the power windows.

. Check tyre pressure.

. Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.

. Check the engine oil level.

. Check the coolant level.

. Fit the number plate ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-3

End-of-Life VehicleRecoveryInformation on end-of-life vehiclerecovery centres and the recyclingof end-of-life vehicles is available onour website. Only entrust this workto an authorised recycling centre.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

Only perform engine compartmentchecks when the ignition is off.

The cooling fan may startoperating even if the ignitionis off.

{ Warning

The ignition system usesextremely high voltage. Do nottouch.

Bonnet

Opening

1. Pull the release lever and returnit to its original position.


10-4 Vehicle Care

2. Reach under front edge of thebonnet and push bonnet releaselever upward.

3. Lift the bonnet gently. Twoair-pressurised support rods willhold the bonnet open.

{ Caution

When the engine is hot, onlytouch the foam padding of thebonnet support rod handle.

Closing

To close the bonnet:

1. Make sure hands and otherbody parts, as well as those ofother persons, are completelyaway from the enginecompartment andbonnet-to-body edges.

2. Lower the bonnet, allowing it todrop from a height of about30cm (1 foot).

3. Make sure the bonnet is lockedfirmly in place.

{ Warning

Pull on the front edge of thebonnet to make sure it is latchedsecurely before you drive yourvehicle.

Do not pull the bonnet releasehandle while your vehicle ismoving.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Do not move your vehicle with thebonnet open. An open bonnet willobscure the driver's vision.

Operating your vehicle with thebonnet open can lead to acollision resulting in damage toyour vehicle, to other property,personal injury or even death.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 DOHC - LHD


10-6 Vehicle Care

2.4 DOHC - RHD


Vehicle Care 10-7

3.0 DOHC - LHD


10-8 Vehicle Care

3.0 DOHC -RHD


Vehicle Care 10-9

DIESEL - LHD


10-10 Vehicle Care

DIESEL - RHD


Vehicle Care 10-11

1. Engine air filter

2. Power steering fluid container

3. Engine oil cap

4. Brake fluid container

5. Engine coolant container

6. Clutch fluid reservoir

7. Fuse block

8. Battery

9. Washer fluid container

10. Dipstick for engine oil level

11. Auxiliary fuse block

Engine OilKeep your engine properlylubricated by keeping the engine oilat the correct level.

It is normal for an engine toconsume some engine oil.

Check the oil level at regularintervals such as every time youstop for fuel.

In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and thevehicle must be on level ground.

Checking engine oil level

1. Park vehicle on level ground.

2. Turn off the engine and give theoil 5 minutes to drain back intothe oil pan. If this is not done,the oil dipstick might not showthe actual level.

3. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itclean.

4. Re-insert dipstick completely.

5. Pull the dipstick out again.

6. Check oil level, as shown on thedipstick. Oil should be betweenMIN and MAX .

If oil level is not clear, read theopposite side of gauge instead.

Different dipsticks are useddepending on engine variant.


10-12 Vehicle Care

7. If the oil level is below MIN, addenough oil of the same grade asis currently in the engine to raisethe oil level to MAX. Do not fillover MAX mark.

{ Warning

Engine oil is an irritant and,if ingested, can cause illness ordeath.

Keep out of reach of children.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Avoid repeated or prolongedcontact with skin.

Wash exposed areas with soapand water or hand cleaner.

{ Warning

Adding too much oil can affectengine operation.

Do not allow oil to go above MAXmark on dipstick.

Overfilling reservoir can damageyour vehicle by:

Increasing oil consumption.

Fouling spark plugs.

Building excessive carbondeposits in the engine.

Changing engine oil and filter

{ Warning

Before attempting to do the work,be sure you are fully acquaintedwith doing this job.

Have a repairer do this work ifyou are not confident ofcompleting the task safely. Werecommend an authorisedrepairer.

Otherwise, you could be injuredor damage the vehicle.

Engine oil looses its ability tolubricate when contaminated. Besure to change your engine oilaccording to maintenance schedule.

Be sure to replace the engine oilfilter each time you changeengine oil.

Under severe conditions, change oiland oil filter more frequently than isrecommended in the standardmaintenance schedule.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Severe conditions include, but arenot limited to:. Frequent cold starts.. Considerable travel in

stop-and-go traffic.. Frequent short trips.. Frequent driving when outside

temperature remains belowfreezing.

. Prolonged idling.

. Frequent low-speed driving.

. Driving in dusty areas.

{ Warning

Engine oil and its containers canbe hazardous to your health.

Avoid repeated or prolongedcontact with engine oil.

Clean your skin and nails withsoap and water, or hand cleanerafter handling engine oil. Also

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

keep this and other toxicmaterials out of the reach ofchildren.

Engine oil can irritate the skin andcan cause illness and even deathif swallowed.

{ Caution

Use of unauthorised or low qualityengine oil or chemical enginetreatments (additives) candamage the engine.

Consult a repairer beforeattempting to use additives. Werecommend that you consult anauthorised repairer.

{ Caution

Do not dispose of used engine oiland filter with your householdwaste.

See your local, authorised wastemanagement facility.

Used engine oil and filter containharmful elements that may beunhealthy to you and threat to theenvironment.

Selecting the right engine oil

Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of thevehicle should have the dexoscertification mark on the container.

This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos specification.


10-14 Vehicle Care

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos-approved engine oil.

{ Caution

Use only engine oil that isapproved to the dexosspecification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexosspecification will show the dexossymbol on the container. Failure

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

to use the recommended engineoil or equivalent can result inengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether the oil isapproved to the dexosspecification, ask your serviceprovider.

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. SAE 0W-30,0W-40, or 5W-40 can also be used.Do not use other viscosity oils suchas SAE 10W-30, 10W-40,or 20W-50.

In an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below -29°C(-20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscosity

grade, be sure to always select oilthat meets the requiredspecification.

Engine oil life system

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions, enginetemperature and mileage. Based ondriving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oillamp displays. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next1,000 km (600 miles). It is possiblethat, if driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system mightindicate that an oil change is notnecessary for up to a year. Theengine oil and filter must be


Vehicle Care 10-15

changed at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5,000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.

After you change the oil, the oil lifemonitor will need to be reset. Seean authorised repairer for service.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem

The engine oil life system calculateswhen to change your engine oil andfilter based on vehicle use. Anytimeyour oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when thenext oil change is required.

To reset the engine oil life system,do one of the following:. Using the scan tool.

Your authorised repairer willreset the system using scan toolafter changing the engine oil.Consult a repairer.

. Using accelerator pedal

Petrol engine

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/START with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the change engine oil lamp comesback on and stays on when youstart your vehicle, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Diesel engine

1. Remove key from ignition switchfor more than one minute. Thenturn on ignition key (do not startengine).

2. Perform the following procedure:

2.1. Press the accelerator pedalto the floor and hold it onthe floor for 2 seconds.

2.2. Release the acceleratorpedal and take your foot offof the pedal for 2 seconds.

2.3. Repeat this sequence (1, 2)two more times (for a totalof three times) withinone minute.

If the change engine oil lamp comesback on and stays on when youstart your vehicle, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Remember to reset the engine oillife system whenever the engineoil is changed.

Recommended engine oil andmaintenance schedule

Recommended engine oil

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-8.

Maintenance schedule

See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11-2.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check theautomatic transmission fluid level.

If you have a problem e.g. leak,have it remedied by a repairer.

Note: Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle. Always use thefluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants.

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-8.

Manual Gearbox FluidIt is not necessary to check themanual gearbox fluid level. If youhave a problem e.g. leak, have itremedied by a repairer.

Note: Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle. Always use thefluid listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Shake the air cleaner element toremove surface dust.

2. Clean the inside of the aircleaner housing.

3. Cover the open filter housingwith a damp cloth while cleaningthe element.

4. Clean air filter element byblowing compressed air throughit in the direction oppositenormal airflow.


Vehicle Care 10-17

{ Caution

The engine needs clean air tooperate properly.

Do not operate your vehiclewithout the air cleaner elementinstalled.

Driving without the air cleanerelement properly installed candamage your engine.

Engine CoolantIn countries with moderate climatethe coolant provides freezeprotection down to approx. -30°C.

In countries with extremely coldclimate the coolant provides freezeprotection down to approx. -40°C.

Maintain a sufficient concentrationof anti-freeze.

{ Caution

Only use approved anti-freeze.

Coolant level

{ Caution

Too low a coolant level can causeengine damage.

When the engine is cool, the coolantlevel should be between the MINand MAX mark on the coolantreservoir. The level of coolant risesas the engine warms and dropsback as the engine cools.

{ Warning

Never remove the coolantreservoir cap when the engineand radiator are hot. It couldcause serious injury. The enginemust be cool before opening thecap. Carefully open the cap,relieving the pressure slowly.

Fill up with a mixture ofdemineralised water and anti-freezeapproved for the vehicle. Install thecap tightly. Have the anti-freezeconcentration checked and have thecause of the coolant loss remediedby a repairer.

Note: If the coolant level falls belowthe MIN mark, refill the radiator with56:44 mix of de-mineralised waterand correct antifreeze.

In order to protect your vehicle inextremely cold weather, use mix of48 percent water and 52 percentantifreeze.


10-18 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Plain water or the wrong mixturecan damage the cooling system.

Do not use plain water, alcohol ormethanol anti-freeze in coolantsystem.

The engine may overheat or evencatch fire.

{ Caution

Coolant can be hazardousmaterial.

Avoid repeated or prolongedcontact with coolant.

Clean your skin and nails withsoap and water after coming incontact with coolant.

Keep out of reach of children.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Coolant can irritate the skin andcan cause illness or death ifswallowed.

{ Caution

It is not needed to add coolantmore frequently than therecommended interval.

If you are adding coolant often,this may be a sign that yourengine needs maintenance.

Contact a repairer for a check ofthe cooling system.

Engine OverheatingIf the engine coolant temperaturegauge pointer is in the red area, or ifyou have any other reason tosuspect the engine may beoverheating:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn off the air conditioning.

3. Let the engine idle for a fewminutes.

4. Be sure the cooling fan isoperating.

{ Warning

If steam is visible, move awayfrom vehicle until engine is cool.Steam can cause serious burns.

Note: Using A/C while driving uplong hills or in heavy traffic cancause the engine overheating.

If the fan is not operating and steamis visible, perform the following:

1. Turn off engine.


Vehicle Care 10-19

2. Move away from vehicle withoutopening the bonnet.

3. Allow engine to cool.

4. When steam is no longer visible,carefully open bonnet.

5. Consult a repairer as soon aspossible.

If the fan is operating and steam isnot visible, perform the following:

1. Carefully open the bonnet.

2. Idle engine until cool.

3. Check coolant level.

If the fan is operating, but enginetemperature does not fall, performthe following:

1. Stop the engine.

2. Carefully open the bonnet.

3. Allow the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level.

If the coolant level is low, check forleaks for following components:

1. Radiator.

2. Radiator hoses.

3. Radiator connections.

4. Heater hoses.

5. Heater hose connections.

6. Water pump.

If you find a leak or other damage,or if the coolant is still leaking,consult a repairer immediately.

{ Warning

Scalding hot coolant steam couldbe blown out under pressure,which could cause serious injury.

Never remove the coolantreservoir cap when engine andradiator are hot.

Power Steering Fluid

1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and pull itstraight up.

4. Wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.


10-20 Vehicle Care

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

Diesel & 3.0Petrol

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be at the hot MAX level.

When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be between MIN andMAX on the dipstick.

2.4 Petrol

When the engine is hot, the levelshould be in HOT range.

When the engine is cold, the fluidlevel should be in COLD range onthe dipstick.

{ Caution

Extremely small amounts ofcontamination can cause steeringsystem damage and cause it tonot work properly.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Do not allow contaminates tocontact the fluid side of thereservoir cap or from entering thereservoir.

{ Caution

Do not operate vehicle withoutthe required amount of powersteering fluid.

To do so can damage powersteering system of your vehicle,leading to costly repairs.

{ Warning

An overflow of the fluid maycause the fluid to burn ordiscolour paintwork.

Do not overfill the reservoir.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

An engine fire can causepersonal injuries and damageyour vehicle and other property.

Washer Fluid

Fill with windscreen washer fluidthat contains anti-freeze.


Vehicle Care 10-21

To refill windscreen washer fluidreservoir:. Use only commercially available

ready-to-use washer fluid for thatpurpose.

. Do not use tap water. Mineralspresent in tap water may plugthe windscreen washer lines.

. If air temperature is likely to gobelow freezing, use windscreenwasher fluid which has sufficientanti-freezing property.

Brake Fluid

Brake and clutch fluid

{ Warning

Brake/clutch fluid is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid contact witheyes, skin, fabrics and paintedsurfaces.

<Brake fluid>

<Clutch fluid>

The brake/clutch fluid level must bebetween the MIN and the MAXmarks.

When filling up, ensure maximumcleanliness as contamination of thebrake fluid can lead to brake systemmalfunctions. Have the cause of theloss of brake fluid remedied by arepairer.

Only use brake fluid approved forthe vehicle.


10-22 Vehicle Care

See "Brake Fluid" underRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-8.

{ Caution

Make sure you thoroughly cleanaround the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap before removingthe cap.

Contamination of the brake/clutchfluid system can affect systemperformance, leading to costlyrepairs.

{ Caution

Using brake fluid other than GMrecommended brake fluid maycause corrosion to components ofbrake system. Corrosion maymake the brake system not workwell and could cause a crash.

{ Caution

An overflow of brake/clutch fluidon the engine may cause the fluidto burn.

Do not overfill the reservoir.

An engine fire can causepersonal injuries and damageyour vehicle and other property.

{ Caution

Do not dispose of used brake/clutch fluid with your householdwaste.

Use your local, authorised wastemanagement facility.

Used brake/clutch fluid and theircontainers are hazardous. Theycan damage your health and theenvironment.

{ Caution

Brake fluid is harsh and canirritate skin and eyes.

Do not allow the brake/clutch fluidto contact your skin or eyes. If itdoes, immediately wash theaffected area thoroughly withsoap and water, or hand cleaner.

Battery

Battery

Vehicles without stop-start systemwill be equipped with a lead acidbattery. Vehicles with stop-startsystem will be equipped with anAGM battery which has higherperformance than lead acid battery.

Replacing the battery

Note: Any deviation from theinstructions given in this paragraphmay lead to a temporarydeactivation of the stop startsystem. Only use batteries that


Vehicle Care 10-23

allow the fuse box to be mountedabove the battery. In vehicles withstop-start system, ensure to havethe AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat)battery replaced with an AGMbattery again. An AGM battery canbe identified by the label on thebattery. We recommend the use ofan original GM battery.

Note: Using an AGM batterydifferent from the original GMbattery might result in a lowerperformance of the stop startsystem. We recommend that youhave the battery replaced by yourauthorised repairer.

The vehicle battery ismaintenance free.

Batteries do not belong inhousehold waste. They must bedisposed of at an appropriaterecycling collection point.

Laying up the vehicle for more than4 weeks can lead to batterydischarge. Disconnect the clampfrom the negative terminal of thevehicle battery.

Ensure the ignition is switched offbefore connecting or disconnectingthe vehicle battery.

See Battery Power Protection onpage 6-9.

Meaning of symbols:. No sparks, naked flames or

smoking.. Always shield eyes. Explosive

gases can cause blindness orinjury.

. Keep the battery out of reach ofchildren.

. The battery contains sulphuricacid which could causeblindness or serious burninjuries.

. See the Owner's Manual forfurther information.

. Explosive gas may be present inthe vicinity of the battery.

{ Warning

Keep smoking materials awayfrom a battery to avoid flames orsparks when the battery ischecked because the explosivegas could be occurred.

If the battery explodes, it can beresult in damages of your vehicleand serious injury or death.

Avoid skin contact with batteryacid because it can damage bycontained highly corrosive andtoxic sulphuric acid.

(Continued)


10-24 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

If you accidentally get it on yourskin, flush the place with waterand get medical help immediately.

Keep batteries out of the reach ofchildren because it containssulphuric acid and gas.

Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes, clothingor paint.

Do not open and tilt the battery.

Diesel Fuel Filter

Diesel Particle Filter

The diesel particle filter systemfilters harmful soot particles out ofthe exhaust gases. The systemincludes a self-cleaning function thatruns automatically during driving.The filter is cleaned by burning offthe soot particles at hightemperature. This process takesplace automatically under set

driving conditions and may takemore than 15 minutes. The emissionof smells and smoke during thisprocess is normal.

Under certain driving conditions,e.g. short distances, the systemcannot clean itself automatically.

If the filter requires cleaning orprevious driving conditions did notenable automatic cleaning, DPFindicator illuminates or flashes. Theindicator will go off the self-cleaningoperation is complete.

Stopping the journey or switching offthe engine during cleaning is notrecommended.

{ Warning

Be sure the following precautionsare taken because the exhaustparts are raised to hightemperature during regenerationof DPF.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Do not placeyour vehicle over papers, leaves,dry grass or other things thatcan burn.

Turn the ignition OFF as soon asyour vehicle enters a garage.

Do not go near the hot exhaustparts including exhaust tail pipe.

Wiper Blade ReplacementProperly functioning windscreenwipers are essential for clear visionand safe driving. Regularly checkthe condition of the wiper blades.Replace hard, brittle or crackedblades or those that smear dirt onthe windscreen.

Foreign material on the windscreenor wiper blades can reduce theeffectiveness of the wipers. If theblades are not wiping properly,


Vehicle Care 10-25

clean both the windscreen and theblades with a good cleaner or milddetergent. Rinse them thoroughlywith water.

Repeat the process, if necessary.There is no way to remove traces ofsilicone from glass. Therefore neverapply silicone polish or wax polishto your vehicle's windscreen or youwill get streak, blade chatter orblade noise that impairs the driver'svision.

Do not use solvents, petrol,kerosene, or paint thinner to cleanwipers. These are harsh and candamage the blades and paintedsurfaces.

Replacing wiper blades

1. Press and hold the wiper bladeretaining clip.

2. Pull the wiper blade off thewiper arm.

3. Install a new wiper blade ontothe arm.

Bulb ReplacementSwitch off the ignition and switch offthe relevant switch or close thedoors.

Only hold a new bulb at the base!Do not touch the bulb glass withbare hands.

Use only the same bulb type forreplacement.

Replace headlamp bulbs from withinthe engine compartment.

Note: After driving in heavy rain orwashing, some exterior lamp lensescould appear frosty.

This condition is caused by thetemperature difference between thelamp inside and outside.

This is similar to the condensationon your windows inside your vehicleduring rain and doesn't indicate aproblem with your vehicle.

If the water leaks into the light bulbcircuitry, have the vehicle checked,we recommend an authorisedrepairer.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Headlamps and ParkingLamps

Dipped beam and main beam

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the fastener plugs thathold the radiator upper cover.

3. Remove the radiator uppercover.

4. Remove three bolts andheadlamp assembly.

5. Remove the headlamp cap.

6. Release the spring that retainsthe bulb.

7. Remove the bulb.

8. Install the proper replacementheadlamp bulb.

9. Reinstall the bulb retainingspring.

10. Replace the headlamp cap.

11. Connect the wiring harnessconnector.

Parking lamps

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the headlampassembly.

3. Remove the headlamp cap.

4. Pull out the bulb holder locatednext to the headlamp high bulb.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the bulb holder.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Replace the headlamp cap inreverse order.

Fog lamps

Have bulbs replaced by a repairer.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Front Indicator Lamps

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the headlampassembly.

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb holder.

4. Rotate the front indicator bulbholder anti-clockwise.

5. Pull the front indicator bulbholder out of the lamp housing.

6. Press the bulb inward and rotateit anti-clockwise to remove itfrom the bulb holder.

7. Install a new bulb into the holderby pressing it in and rotating itclockwise.

8. Install the holder into the lamphousing by rotating it clockwise.

9. Reinstall the headlampassembly.

Tail lamps, Indicator,Brake lamps, andReversing Lamps

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the both covers.

3. Remove two screws and thelamp assembly.

4. Remove the bulb holder byrotating it anti-clockwise.

5. Remove the bulb from the holderby pressing the bulb and rotatingit anti-clockwise.

6. Insert a correct replacement bulbinto the bulb holder.

7. Replace the bulb holder into thelamp housing. Twist the bulbholder clockwise to secure.

8. Replace the lamp housing intothe vehicle using the two screwsremoved earlier.

9. Close the tailgate.

Tail lamps and brakelamps (LED)

Have them inspected and replacedby a repairer.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Side Indicator LampsIf the side indicator lamp in theoutside rearview mirror is notoperating, have it checked byrepairer.

Centre High-MountedBrake lamp (CHMBL)If the CHMSL is not operating, haveit checked by repairer.

Rear Fog LampsHave LED lamp replaced by arepairer.

Number Plate Lamp

1. Remove two screws and thelamp cover.

2. To remove the bulb holder fromthe lamp housing, rotate the bulbholder anti-clockwise.

3. Pull the bulb out from the bulbholder.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. Install the bulb holder into thelamp housing by rotating thebulb holder clockwise.

6. Replace the lamp covers.

Interior Lamps

Courtesy lamps

1. To remove, prise the oppositeside of the lamp switch using aflat-blade screwdriver. (Becareful not to make scratches.)

2. Remove the bulb.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinstall the lamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Electrical System

FusesData on the replacement fuse mustmatch the data on thedefective fuse.

In a box above the positive terminalof the battery are some main fuses.If necessary have them changed bya repairer.

Before replacing a fuse, turn off therespective switch and the ignition.

A blown fuse can be recognised byits melted wire. Do not replace thefuse until the cause of the fault hasbeen remedied.

Some functions are protected byseveral fuses.

Fuses may also be inserted withoutexistence of a function.

Note: Not all fuse box descriptionsin this manual may apply to yourvehicle.

When inspecting the fuse box, referto the fuse box label.

Fuse extractor

A fuse extractor may be located inthe fuse box in the enginecompartment.

Place the fuse extractor on thevarious types of fuse from the top orside, and withdraw fuse.

Fuse block

1. Interior fuse block is located inthe left side of the frontpassenger foot well.

2. Engine room fuse block is nextto the coolant reservoir.


10-30 Vehicle Care

3. Auxiliary engine room fuse block(Diesel only) is located in thecentre of the front panel.

Note: Not all fuse blockdescriptions in this manual may beapplicable to your vehicle. It isaccurate at the time of printing.When you inspect the fuse box onyour vehicle, refer to the fuse boxlabel.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Interior fuse block


10-32 Vehicle Care

Notice: USE THE DESIGNEDFUSE ONLY

* : optional equipment


Vehicle Care 10-33

Engine compartment fuse block


10-34 Vehicle Care


* : optional equipment


Vehicle Care 10-35

Auxiliary engine compartment fuse block (Diesel only)


10-36 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Tools

Tools

Your spare tyre, jack and tools aresecured in the luggagecompartment and below the rearbumper.

In some models, jack handle type isapplied to the vehicle.

The actual tools in the vehicle maydiffer from the description.

{ Warning

Always store jack, spare tyre,other tools and equipmentsecurely in their correct location.

Do not store jack, spare tyre,or other equipment in passengercompartment.

In the event of a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment can bethrown around inside your vehicleand cause personal injuries


Vehicle Care 10-37

Removing the jack and tools


2. Pull up the floor cover and locatethe wing-bolt.

3. Remove the wing-bolt from thejack by rotating it anti-clockwise.

4. Remove the jack and tool bag.

5. Remove the straps holding thebag containing the tool. Thenremove the wheel wrench andjack handle from the bag.

Removing the spare tyre

1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver topry off the whole cover abovethe rear bumper.

2. Use the supplied wheel wrenchto loosen a bolt to fix aspare tyre.

3. Unhook the cable on the tyrecarrier which is located belowthe rear bumper.

4. Remove the spare tyre from thetyre carrier.

Note: To eliminate the possibility ofthe jack and tools rattling while thecar is moving, stow them securelyunder the floor covering.

Jack specification

Maximum working load : 900 kg

{ Warning

We designed the jack for use onyour vehicle only.

Do not use jack provided withyour vehicle on other vehicles.

Never exceed the jack'smaximum permissible load.

Use of this jack on other vehiclesmay damage the other vehicles oryour jack and lead to personalinjury.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TyresTyre condition, wheelcondition

Drive over edges slowly and at rightangles if possible. Driving oversharp edges can cause tyre andwheel damage. Do not trap tyres onthe kerb when parking.

Regularly check the wheels fordamage. Seek the assistance of arepairer in the event of damage orunusual wear.

Winter TyresWinter tyres improve driving safetyat temperatures below 7°C andshould therefore be fitted on allwheels.

Tyre DesignationsE.g. 215/60 R 16 95 H

215: Tyre width, mm

60: Cross-section ratio (tyre heightto tyre width), %

R: Belt type: Radial

RF: Type: RunFlat

16: Wheel diameter, inches

95: Load index e.g. 95 is equivalentto 690 kg

H: Speed code letter

Speed code letter:

Q: up to 160 km/h (100 mph)

S: up to 180 km/h (112 mph)

T: up to 190 km/h (118 mph)

H: up to 210 km/h (130 mph)

V: up to 240 km/h (150 mph)

W: up to 270 km/h (168 mph)

Tyre PressureCheck the pressure of cold tyres atleast every 14 days and before anylong journey. Do not forget thespare wheel.

Unscrew the valve cap.

Tyre pressures label is on thedriver's door frame.

The tyre pressure data refers to coldtyres. It applies to summer andwinter tyres.

Always inflate the spare tyre to thepressure specified for full load.

Incorrect tyre pressures will impairsafety, vehicle handling, comfort andfuel economy and will increasetyre wear.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Note: Check inflation pressurewhen tyres are cold. Warm tyresproduce inaccurate readings. Tyrescan become warm after you havedriven more than one mile (1.6km)and stay warm for up to three hoursafter vehicle has been sitting.

{ Warning

If the pressure is too low, this canresult in considerable tyrewarmup and internal damage,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

leading to tread separation andeven to tyre blow-out at highspeeds.

Tyre Pressure MonitorSystemThe tyre pressure monitoringsystem checks the pressure of allfour wheels once per minute whenvehicle speed exceeds a certainlimit.

All wheels must be equipped withpressure sensors and the tyresmust have the prescribed pressure.If wheels without sensors aremounted, the tyre pressuremonitoring system is notoperational. Retrofitting of sensorsis possible.

Tread DepthCheck tread depth at regularintervals.

Tyres should be replaced for safetyreasons at a tread depth of 2-3 mm(4 mm for winter tyres).

The legally permissible minimumtread depth (1.6 mm) has beenreached when the tread has worndown as far as one of the treadwear indicators (TWI). Their positionis indicated by markings on thesidewall.

If there is more wear at the frontthan the rear, swap round frontwheels and rear wheels. Ensurethat the direction of rotation of thewheels is the same as before.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Tyres age, even if they are notused. We recommend tyrereplacement every 6 years.

Tyre RotationTyres are rotated to achieve a moreuniform wear for all tyres. The firstrotation is the most important.

Any time unusual wear is noticed,rotate the tyres as soon as possibleand check the wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tyres orwheels.

When rotating the tyres, always usethe correct rotation pattern shownhere. Do not include the spare tyrein the tyre rotation. Adjust the frontand rear tyres to the recommendedinflation pressure on the Tyre andLoading Information label after thetyres have been rotated.

Reset the Tyre Pressure MonitorSystem.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the centre of the wheelhub with wheel bearing grease aftera wheel change or tyre rotation toprevent corrosion or rust build-up.Do not get grease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on the wheelnuts or bolts.

Different Size Tyres andWheelsIf tyres of a different size than thosefitted at the factory are used, it maybe necessary to reprogram thespeedometer as well as the nominaltyre pressure and make othervehicle modifications.

After converting to a different tyresize, have the label with tyrepressures replaced.


Vehicle Care 10-41

{ Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheelsmay lead to accidents and willinvalidate the vehicle typeapproval.

{ Warning

Do not use different size and typeof tyres and wheels than thoseoriginally installed on the vehicle.It can affect safety andperformance of the vehicle.It could lead to handling failure orrollover and serious injury. Whenreplacing tyres, be sure to installall four tyres and wheels of thesame size, type, tread, brand andload-carrying capacity. The use ofany other tyre size or type mayseriously affect ride, handling,ground clearance, stoppingdistance, body clearance andspeedometer reliability.

Wheel CoversWheel covers and tyres that arefactory approved for the respectivevehicle and comply with all of therelevant wheel and tyre combinationrequirements must be used.

If the wheel covers and tyres usedare not factory approved, the tyresmust not have a rim protectionridge.

Wheel covers must not impair brakecooling.

{ Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheelcovers could lead to suddenpressure loss and therebyaccidents.

Wheel Alignment andTyre BalanceThe tyres and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tyre life and best

overall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tyre balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Also, your vehicle'ssuspension and steering systemsneed some time to settle from theshipping process, and adjust to theway you drive and the amount ofpassengers and cargo you carrywith you. GM recommends that youdrive your new vehicle at least 800kilometres before evaluating yourvehicle for steering pull. Some slightpull to the left or right, depending onthe crown of the road and/or otherroad surface variations such astroughs or ruts, is normal. So,consider requesting an alignmentcheck only if the vehicle issignificantly pulling to one side orthe other, or if you notice unusualtyre wear. If the vehicle is vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, thetyres and wheels may need to bere-balanced. See your dealer forproper diagnosis.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Tyre Chains

Before fitting chains, remove wheelcovers to avoid scratching them.. Follow the chain manufacturer's

instructions.. Only use tyre chains on the front

tyre of 16 inch size. Do not usechains on the other tyre size.

. Re-tighten the chains afterdriving about 0.5 mile(about 1.0km)

{ Caution

Use of snow chains couldadversely affect vehicle handling.

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph)or the chain manufacturer'srecommended speed limit,whichever is lower.

Avoid sharp turns, bumps andholes.

Avoid locked-wheel braking.

Note: SAE class S-type chains arethe proper type for your vehicle.

Always drive slowly when you areusing tyre chains.

If you hear the chains contacting thevehicle, stop and re-tighten thechains.

If the contact continues, slow downuntil it stops.

Tyre Repair Kit

Storing the tyre sealant andcompressor kit

To access the tyre sealant andcompressor kit:


2. Lift the cover.

3. Remove the tyre sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tyre sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

{ Warning

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust may

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-43

Warning (Continued)

enter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.

It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tyre could causethe tyre to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tyre sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tyre to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ Warning

Storing the tyre sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tyresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tyre sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tyre, tyre changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tyre.

The tyre sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (1/4 in) in thetread area of the tyre. It can also beused to inflate an underinflated tyre.

If the tyre has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tyre istoo severely damaged for the tyresealant and compressor kit to beeffective.

Read and follow all of the tyresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

1. Pressure Gauge

2. Pressure Deflation Button(White)

3. Selector Switch


10-44 Vehicle Care

4. On/Off Button (Orange)

5. Tyre Sealant Canister

6. Air Only Hose (Black Hose/White Tip)

7. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear Hose/Orange Tip)

8. Power Plug

Tyre sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tyre sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.

Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tyre. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced.

Using the tyre sealant andcompressor kit to temporarilyseal and inflate apunctured tyre

When using the tyre sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.

This will help to inflate the tyrefaster.

If a tyre goes flat, avoid further tyreand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tyre.

1. Remove the tyre sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (7)and the power plug (8).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tyre valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tyre by turning itanti-clockwise.


Vehicle Care 10-45

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (7)onto the tyre valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (8) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (3)anti-clockwise to the Sealant +Air position.

9. Press the on/off (4) button toturn the tyre sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tyre.

The pressure gauge (1) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tyre. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tyre, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tyre inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tyre to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (1). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tyre and LoadingInformation label.

The pressure gauge (1) mayread higher than the actual tyrepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

{ Caution

If the recommended pressurecannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tyre is too severelydamaged and the tyre sealantand compressor kit cannot inflatethe tyre. Remove the power plug

(Continued)


10-46 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

from the accessory power outletand unscrew the inflating hosefrom the tyre valve.

11. Press the on/off button (4) toturn the tyre sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tyre is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in thetyre, therefore, Steps 12 to18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetyre sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (8) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (7)anti-clockwise to remove itfrom the tyre valve stem.

14. Replace the tyre valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose(7), and the power plug (8)back in their original location.

16. If the flat tyre was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (5) and place itin a highly visible location.

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damagedtyre is repaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 miles) to distribute thesealant in the tyre.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tyre pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under"Using the Tyre Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tyre (NotPunctured)."

If the tyre pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tyre is tooseverely damaged and the tyresealant cannot seal the tyre.

If the tyre pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetyre to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tyre or vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (5) and sealant/airhose (7) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal regulations and practices.


Vehicle Care 10-47

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tyreusing the tyre sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorised dealerwithin a 161 km (100 miles) ofdriving to have the tyrerepaired or replaced.

Using the tyre sealant andcompressor kit without sealantinflate a tyre (not punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tyre with air only and not sealant:

If a tyre goes flat, avoid further tyreand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers.

1. Remove the tyre sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (6) andthe power plug (8).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tyre valve stemis positioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tyre valve stem capby turning it anti-clockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (6) ontothe tyre valve stem and turn itclockwise until tight.


10-48 Vehicle Care

6. Plug the power plug (8) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has acigarette lighter, use thecigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (3)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (4) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetyre with air only.

10. Inflate the tyre to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (1). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tyre and LoadingInformation label.

The pressure gauge (1) mayread higher than the actual tyrepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

If you inflate the tyre higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjust theexcess pressure by pressingthe pressure deflationbutton (4) until the properpressure reading is reached.

This option is only functionalwhen using the air onlyhose (6).


Vehicle Care 10-49

11. Press the on/off button (4) toturn the tyre sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetyre sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (8) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose(6) from the tyre valve stem, byturning it anti-clockwise, andreplace the tyre valvestem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (6)and the power plug (8) back inits original location.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tyre sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and installation of thesealant canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap both hoses.

2. Slide the canister away from thecompressor housing.

3. Unscrew the hose connected tothe canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Attach the hose to the canisterand tighten.


10-50 Vehicle Care

6. Slide the new canister intoplace. Make sure it sits in thecompressor housing socket.

7. Replace both hoses to theiroriginal location.

Tyre ChangingMixing tyres could cause you to losecontrol while driving.

If you mix tyres of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tyres), the vehicle maynot handle properly, and you couldhave a crash. Using tyres ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the correct size,brand, and type of tyres on allwheels.

Some vehicles are equipped with atyre repair kit instead of a sparewheel.

See Tyre Repair Kit on page 10-42.

Make the following preparations andobserve the following information:. Pull your vehicle over to a safe

place away from traffic.. Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The frontwheels must be in thestraight-ahead position.

. Apply the parking brake.

For manual gearbox, engagefirst gear or reverse gear.

For automatic transmission,engage P position.

. Turn off the engine andremove key.

. Turn on the hazard lights.

. Use a wedge, block of wood,or rocks in front of and behindthe tyre that is diagonal from thetyre you plan to change.

. Have all passengers get out ofthe vehicle.

. Remove the spare wheel.

. Never change more than onewheel at once.

. Use the jack only to changewheels in case of puncture, notfor seasonal winter or summertyre change.

. If the ground on which thevehicle is standing is soft, a solidboard (max. 1cm (0.4 inches)thick) should be placed underthe jack.

. No people or animals may be inthe vehicle when it is jacked-up.

. Never crawl under a jacked-upvehicle.

. Do not start the vehicle when itis raised on the jack.

. Clean wheel nuts and threadbefore mounting the wheel.

{ Warning

We designed the jack for use onyour vehicle only.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-51

Warning (Continued)

Do not use jack provided withyour vehicle on other vehicles.

Never exceed the jack'smaximum permissible load.

Use of this jack on other vehiclesmay damage the other vehicles oryour jack and lead to personalinjury.

How to change a flat tyre

1. Remove the jack, wheel wrench,jack handle and spare tyre fromthe storage in the luggagecompartment and below the rearbumper.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosenthe wheel nuts by one turn each.

{ Caution

Do not remove any of the nutsuntil you have raised the wheeloff the ground.

3. Insert the jack handle and thewheel wrench into the jack.

4. Rotate the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the lift headslightly.

5. Locate the jack according to thefigure below. There is a notch atthe front and rear of the vehicleunder the doors.

6. Place the jack vertically at thefront or the rear jacking notchnext to the wheel you plan tochange.

{ Caution

Do not attempt to raise vehicleuntil the jack is in the properposition, and secure both to thevehicle and the ground.


10-52 Vehicle Care

7. Raise vehicle by rotating wheelwrench or jack handle clockwiseuntil lifting head fits firmly intoappropriate notch and tyre is offthe ground about1 inch (2.5 cm).

{ Caution

As the jack begins to raise thevehicle, make sure jack isproperly placed so it will not slip.

Note: Do not raise vehicle morethan is necessary to change wheel.

{ Warning

Never get under car or start orrun the engine while car issupported by a jack.

Vehicle may slip off the jackresulting in serious injury ordeath.

8. Remove wheel nuts completelyby turning anti-clockwise.

9. Remove tyre and wheel.

10. Mount spare tyre on thewheel hub.

{ Caution

Never use oil or grease onwheel nuts.

Always use correct wheel nuts.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

As soon as possible, take yourcar to a repairer and have thewheel nuts tightened according tospecifications.

If tightened incorrectly, the nutsmight come loose.

11. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.


Vehicle Care 10-53

12. Rotate wheel wrench or jackhandle anti-clockwise andlower vehicle to the ground.

13. Tighten wheel nuts firmly to92 lb-ft (125 Nm) in a diagonalsequence. 1→2→3→4→5(See fig. below)

{ Warning

Make sure to use the correct nutsor bolts tightened to the propertorque.

Incorrect wheel nuts or bolts orimproperly tightened wheel nutsor bolts can cause the wheel tocome loose and even come off.This could lead to an accident.

14. Hang the tyre carrier on thesupport rod and tighten the boltin the hole above the rearbumper to 4.4 lb-ft (6 Nm) toraise the tyre carrier.

15. Hook the cable and reinstallthe hole cover in its originalposition.

16. Secure the jack and tools intheir original position and theflat tyre in the luggagecompartment.

{ Caution

Do not store the flat tyre in theposition below the rear bumperwhere the spare tyre was. The flattyre can come off the position.

{ Warning

Do not store the jack and tools inthe passenger compartment.

In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment can be thrownaround the vehicle and causepersonal injuries.

Note: The compact spare tyre is forshort term use only.

Consult a repairer to replace thespare tyre with a regular tyre assoon as possible.

{ Caution

When using the jack, the vehiclecould become unstable andmove, damaging the vehicle andcausing personal injury.

. Use jack supplied at correctjacking position.

. When installing the jack forlifting the vehicle, it should beperpendicular to the ground.

. Do not go under a jacked-upvehicle.

. Do not start vehicle whilejacked-up.

(Continued)


10-54 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. Before jacking, get allpassengers out of the vehicleand clear of vehicle and othertraffic.

. Use jack only for changingwheels.

. Do not jack the vehicle on aninclined or slippery surface.

. Use jacking position nearestto the wheel requiringchanging.

. Block wheel diagonallyopposite the wheel to bechanged.

. Before jacking, ensureparking brake is on and thetransaxle is set in 1st orreverse gear (M/T) or P (A/T).

. Do not jack the vehicle andchange the wheel wheretraffic is close.

{ Caution

Call a garage or motoring servicefor assistance where conditionsare not satisfactory for jacking thecar or if you are not confident ofcompleting the task safely.

Jump Starting

{ Caution

Do not try to start vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

This can damage catalyticconverter and automatictransaxle, and may causepersonal injury.

You can start vehicle that has adischarged battery by transferringelectrical power to it from a batteryin another vehicle.

{ Warning

Batteries can explode. You couldbe burnt by battery acid andelectrical short could injure you ordamage the vehicles.

. Do not expose battery toflames or sparks.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-55

Warning (Continued)

. Do not lean over battery whilejump starting vehicle.

. Do not allow cable terminalsto touch each other.

. Wear eye protection whenworking near any battery.

. Do not allow battery fluid tocontact eyes, skin, fabric,or painted surfaces.

. Make sure battery providingjump start has the samevoltage as the batteryreceiving the jump.

. Do not disconnect dischargedbattery from vehicle.

Failure to follow theseprecautions or the followinginstructions for starting an enginewith jump leads can cause battery

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

to explode, resulting in burns frombattery acid, or electrical shortcircuit.

This can create damage toelectrical systems in bothvehicles, and cause seriouspersonal injury.

Before jump starting

1. Apply parking brake.

2. For a vehicle with automatictransaxle, shift to PARK, and formanual transaxle, shift toNEUTRAL.

3. Switch off all electricalaccessories.

{ Caution

Turn audio system off before jumpstarting your vehicle. Otherwiseyou may damage audio system.

{ Warning

Always route jump leads so theycannot catch on rotating parts inthe engine compartment.

Otherwise you may damagevehicle and cause serious injury.

Attaching jump leads

To jump start your vehicle, connectthe jump leads in the followingorder:


10-56 Vehicle Care

1. Connect one end of the firstjump lead to the positiveterminal of the battery providingthe jump start (identified by "+"sign on the battery case orterminal).

2. Connect the other end of thissame jump lead to the positiveterminal of the dischargedbattery ("+" sign).

3. Connect the first end of the otherjump lead to the negativeterminal of the battery providingthe jump start (identified by "-"sign on the battery case orterminal).

{ Warning

Last connection to the vehicle tobe charged should NOT be madeto the negative (-) batteryterminal.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Attach the clamp for this lastconnection to a steel bracketbolted to the engine block.

This last connection should be asfar away from the battery aspossible.

Connecting the jump lead to thenegative terminal of thedischarged battery could result inarcing and possibly a batteryexplosion.

Serious personal injury or vehicledamage can result.

4. Connect the other end of thesecond jump lead to ground onthe other vehicle, such as asteel bracket bolted to theengine block.

5. The engine of the vehicleproviding the jump start can beallowed to run during the jumpstart.

Once the previously dischargedvehicle is running:

1. Carefully disconnect the groundconnection (-). Begin with thevehicle with the dischargedbattery. Leave the dischargedvehicle running.

2. Disconnect the negative leadfrom vehicle providing the jump.

3. Disconnect the "+" lead fromboth batteries. Store the jumpleads with the spare tyre.

4. Operate the discharged vehiclefor approximately 20 minutes.This will allow the chargingsystem to recharge your battery.

5. If this discharge conditionreoccurs, consult a repairer.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Towing the VehicleIf you need to have your vehicletowed, please use our servicenetwork or professional towingcompany.

The best method is to have thevehicle transported using a recoveryvehicle.

If towing by 2 wheels, lift the frontdriving wheels and tow with the fronttyres locked.

Towing the vehicle with allwheel drive system

Flat-bed equipment is the bestmethod of towing the vehicle to beequipped with all wheel drive (AWD)system to avoid any damages.

If not available to use a flat-bedequipment, use a towing dolly to towthe vehicle as illustrated below.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If you tow the vehicle equippedwith the all wheel drive (AWD)system while front or rear tyresare rolling on the road, the drivesystem in the vehicle could beseverely damaged.

Never tow your vehicle with thefront and rear tyres on the road.

Please observe the followingprocedures when towing a vehicle:. No passenger should remain in

the vehicle being towed.. Release the parking brake of the

towed vehicle and place thetransmission gear in neutral.

. Switch on the emergencywarning lights.

. Keep the speed limits.

Emergency towing

If it is not possible to have yourvehicle towed by a recovery vehicle,proceed as follows:

Front Towing Eye

The front towing eye is providedunder the front bumper. Remove airdam of driver's side and attachtowing eye. A driver must be in thevehicle to steer it and operate thebrakes.

Towing in this manner may be doneonly on hard-surfaced road for ashort distance and at low speeds.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Also the wheels, axles, drive train,steering and brakes must be all in agood condition.

{ Caution

When towing the vehicle with atow rope, the vehicle can bedamaged.

To reduce damage:. Use towing eye only if noother towing equipment isavailable.

. Only tow the vehicle from thefront.

. Keep tow rope clear ofbumper.

. Ensure tow rope is securelyfixed to towing eye, at bothends. Check by pulling ontow rope.

. Towing with a tow rope couldcause severe automatictransaxle damage. When

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

towing vehicle with automatictransaxle, use flat bed orwheel lift equipment.

Vehicle with automatictransmission : Do not tow thevehicle using tow eye. Towingwith a tow rope could causesevere automatic transaxledamage. When towing vehiclewith automatic transaxle, use flatbed or wheel lift equipment.

. For a vehicle with manualgearbox, the vehicle must betowed facing forward, notfaster than 88km/h(55mph).In all other cases and whenthe transmission is defective,the front axle must be raisedoff the ground.

. Drive off slowly and avoidjerky movements.

{ Warning

When towing with a tow rope,control of towed vehicle canbe lost.

. Do not tow if the wheels,transaxle, axles, steering orbrakes are damaged.

. Do not remove the key fromthe ignition switch as this willlock the steering and this willmake the vehicle undriveable.

{ Caution

Do not use transport tie-downhook to tow your vehicle.

The vehicle could be damaged.

Rear Towing Eye Attachment

When towing another vehicle, usethe rear towing eye attachment.


10-60 Vehicle Care

To use the rear towing eyeattachment, do the following:

1. Find the rear towing eyeattachment below the floor coverin the luggage compartment.

2. Open the cover on the rearbumper and screw the towingeye attachment firmly in place.

When the rear towing eyeattachment is used, always pull thecable or chain in a straight directionwith respect to the eye. Do notapply force to the hook from any

side direction. To prevent damage,do not take up slack in the cable tooquickly.

{ Caution

Do not use transport tie-downhook to tow another vehicle.

The vehicle could be damaged.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

The locks are lubricated at thefactory using a high quality lockcylinder grease. Use de-icing agentonly when absolutely necessary, asthis has a degreasing effect andimpairs lock function. After usingde-icing agent, have the locksregreased by a repairer.

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle isexposed to environmentalinfluences. Wash and wax yourvehicle regularly. When usingautomatic vehicle washes, select aprogramme that includes waxing.

Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,pollen and the like should becleaned off immediately, as theycontain aggressive constituentswhich can cause paint damage.


Vehicle Care 10-61

If using a vehicle wash, comply withthe vehicle wash manufacturer'sinstructions. The windscreen wipersand rear window wiper must beswitched off. Lock the vehicle sothat the fuel filler flap cannot beopened. Remove antenna andexternal accessories such as roofracks etc.

If you wash your vehicle by hand,make sure that the insides of thewheel housings are also thoroughlyrinsed out.

Clean edges and folds on openeddoors and the bonnet as well as theareas they cover.

Have the door hinges of all doorsgreased by a repairer.

Do not clean the enginecompartment with a steam-jet orhigh-pressure jet cleaner.

Thoroughly rinse and leather-off thevehicle. Rinse leather frequently.Use separate leathers for painted

and glass surfaces: remnants ofwax on the windows will impairvision.

Do not use hard objects to removespots of tar. Use tar removal sprayon painted surfaces.

Exterior lights

Headlamp and other lamp coversare made of plastic.

Do not use any abrasive or causticagents, do not use an ice scraper,and do not clean them dry.

When cleaning the insects debris,grease dirt and tar on the exteriorlamps or lenses, use only lukewarmwater, a soft cloth, and a carwashing soap.

Hard cleaning with dry cloth can bedamage on the exterior lampor lens.

Don't clean the exterior lamps withintensive car-washing fluid.

Avoid using the hazardous cleanerunder turning on the light. It can becaused the lens crack by chemicalreaction.

Notice: Follow the car-washingguide and use the mild detergent.

Micro lens cracks and weldingarea cracks may be caused if thecar-wash guide is not followed.

Never use washing fluid as belowfor a cleaning purpose.. Acetone. Benzene. Toluene. xylene. Thinner

Polishing and waxing

Wax the vehicle regularly (at thelatest when water no longer beads).Otherwise, the paintwork willdry out.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Polishing is necessary only if thepaint has become dull or if soliddeposits have become attachedto it.

Paintwork polish with silicone formsa protective film, making waxingunnecessary.

Plastic body parts must not betreated with wax or polishingagents.

Windows and windscreenwiper blades

Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamoisleather together with windowcleaner and insect remover.

When cleaning the rear window,make sure the heating elementinside is not damaged.

For mechanical removal of ice, usea sharp-edged ice scraper. Pressthe scraper firmly against the glassso that no dirt can get under it andscratch the glass.

Clean smearing wiper blades with asoft cloth and window cleaner.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jetcleaners.

Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheelcleaner.

Rims are painted and can betreated with the same agents asthe body.

Paintwork damage

Rectify minor paintwork damagewith a touch-up pen before rustforms. Have more extensivedamage or rust areas repaired by arepairer.

Underbody

Corrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal or dust control cancollect on the underbody of yourvehicle. Failure to remove thesematerials can accelerate corrosionand rust.

Periodically use plain water to flushthese materials from the underbodyof your vehicle.

Take care to clean any areas inwhich mud and other debris cancollect. Loosen any sedimentpacked in closed area beforeflushing with water.

Interior Care

Interior and upholstery

Only clean the vehicle interior,including the instrument panelfascia and panelling, with a dry clothor interior cleaner.

The instrument panel should only becleaned using a soft damp cloth.

Clean fabric upholstery with avacuum cleaner and brush. Removestains with an upholstery cleaner.

Clean seat belts with lukewarmwater or interior cleaner.

{ Caution

Close Velcro fasteners as openVelcro fasteners on clothing coulddamage seat upholstery.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Plastic and rubber parts

Plastic and rubber parts can becleaned with the same cleaner asused to clean the body. Use interiorcleaner if necessary. Do not use anyother agent. Avoid solvents andpetrol in particular. Do not use highpressure jet cleaners.


10-64 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationService Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

General Information

Service InformationIn order to ensure economical andsafe vehicle operation and tomaintain the value of your vehicle, itis of vital importance that allmaintenance work is carried out atthe proper intervals as specified.

Confirmations

Confirmation of service is recordedin the Service Guide.

The date and mileage is completedwith the stamp and signature of theservicing repairer.

Make sure that the Service Guide iscompleted correctly as continuousproof of service is essential if anywarranty or goodwill claims are tobe met, and is also a benefit whenselling the vehicle.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled maintenance

Maintenance Interval

Every 1 year / 15,000km(10,000 miles) (whichever occurs first)

Maintenance I – Use Maintenance Ifor the first service or if MaintenanceII was performed previously

Maintenance II – Use MaintenanceII if the previous service performedwas Maintenance I.

For vehicles equipped with an oil lifemonitoring system - If the oil changelamp illuminates and it has been10 months or more from theprevious maintenance, then therelevant maintenance should alsobe carried out.



No Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

1 Replace engine oil and filter. R R

2 Inspect for any leaks or damage. I I

3 Inspect engine air filter. I I

4 Inspect tyres for inflation pressures and wear. I I

5 Inspect brake system. I I

6 Inspect engine coolant and windscreen washer fluid levelsand add fluid as needed.

I I

7 Inspect suspension and steering components. I I

8 Inspect wiper blades and the operation of exterior lighting. I I

9 Inspect drive belts. I I

10 Perform any required additional services - see applicablesection.

I I

11 Check for Field Actions. I I

Maintenance 2 - perform all services described inMaintenance 1, plus the following

12 Replace Brake Fluid. R

13 Inspect engine cooling system. I

14 Inspect restraint system components. I



No Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

15 Inspect powertrain and driveline components. I

16 Lubricate body components. I

I - Inspect these items and theirrelated parts. If necessary, correct,clean, replenish, adjust or replace.

R - Replace or change.

No Description Captiva

17 Replace pollen filter Every 15,000km(10,000 miles) / 1 years

18 Replace air filter Every 60,000km(40,000 miles) / 4 years

19 Replace spark plugs Every 150,000km(100,000 miles) / 10 years

20 Replace diesel fuel filter Except Russia Every 60,000km(40,000 miles) / 2 years

Russia Every 30,000km(20,000 miles) / 2 years

21 Replace engine coolant Every 240,000km(160,000 miles) / 5 years

22 Replace automatic transmission oil Normal conditions : every150,000km(100,000 miles)Severe conditions : every 75,000km(50,000 miles)



Footnotes

Maintenance Item Note

1 Change engine oil immediately if the change engine oil lamp illuminates in theinstruments cluster.If driving under severe conditions : short distance driving, extensive idling or driving industy condition, engine oil and the filter may require replacement more often.

2 Fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem. The system should beinspected and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

3 & 17 If driving regularly in dusty conditions, inspect the filter more frequently.If driving regularly in dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.

5 Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and discs for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,callipers, handbrake, etc.

7 Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damage, loose ormissing parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering components for, binding, cracks,chafing, etc.

8 Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or contamination. Clean the windscreen andwiper blades, if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged.

12 If driving under severe conditions : driving in hilly or mountainous terrain, or towing atrailer frequently, brake fluid may require replacement more often.




13 Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen, or deterio-rated. Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts if needed. To helpensure correct operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap andcleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended.

14 Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working correctly.Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything thatmight keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Ensure any torn orfrayed safety belts are replaced.

16 Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and latches, bonnet hinges and latches, andboot lid hinges and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

General for autotransmission

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:. In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or

higher.. In hilly or mountainous terrain.. When doing frequent trailer towing.. Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery service.

General for belts Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.




General all Check all systems for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any component that has excessive wear.

Tyre condition &inflation pressure

Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Wheel alignment If necessary, rotate and balance wheels.

Additional servicing

Extreme operating conditions

Extreme operating conditions aregiven when at least one of thefollowing occurs frequently:. Repeated short-distance driving

less than 5 miles (10 Km).. Extensive idling and/or

slow-speed driving instop-and-go traffic.

. Driving on dusty roads.

. Driving on hilly or mountainousterrain.

. Towing a trailer.

. Driving in heavy city trafficwhere the outside temperaturesregularly reach 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

. Driving as a taxi, police ordelivery vehicle.

. Frequent driving when outsidetemperature remains belowfreezing.

Police vehicles, taxis and drivingschool vehicles are also classifiedas operating under extremeconditions.

Under extreme operating conditions,it may be necessary to have certainscheduled service work done morefrequently than the scheduledintervals.

Seek technical advice on theservicing requirements dependenton the specific operating conditions.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluidsand LubricantsOnly use products that have beentested and approved. Damageresulting from the use ofnon-approved materials will not becovered by the warranty.

{ Warning

Operating materials arehazardous and could bepoisonous. Handle with care. Payattention to information given onthe containers.

Engine Oil

Engine Oil is identified by its Qualityand its Viscosity Grade. "Quality"and "Specification" are equivalentterms in this respect. Engine OilQuality is more important thanViscosity when selecting whichEngine Oil to use. The Oil Quality

ensures e.g. engine cleanliness,wear protection and oil ageingcontrol, whereas Viscosity Gradegives information on the oil'sthickness over a temperature range.

Engine Oil Quality for Service

dexos

Selecting the right Engine Oil

Selecting the right Engine Oildepends on the proper OilSpecification and SAE ViscosityGrade.

Use and ask for Engine Oils withthe dexos™ Certification Logo. Oilsmeeting the requirements of yourvehicle should have the dexos™Certification Logo on the container.

This Logo indicates that the oil hasbeen approved by GM to thedexos™ Specification.

Your vehicle's Engine was filled atthe factory with dexos™ approvedEngine Oil.

Use only engine oil that is approvedto the dexos specification or anequivalent engine oil of theappropriate viscosity grade.

If you are unsure whether your oil isapproved to the dexos specification,ask your service provider.

Use of substitute engine oils ifdexos is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oil of thequalities mentioned above. Use of



oils that do not meet the dexosspecification, however, may result inreduced performance under certaincircumstances.

Topping up Engine Oil

Engine Oils of differentmanufacturers and brands can bemixed as long as they comply withthe required Engine Oil (Quality andViscosity).

If Engine Oil of the required Qualityis not available, a maximum of1 Litre ACEA A3/B3(Petrol) ACEAA3/B4 or ACEA C3(Diesel) may beused (only once between each oilchange).

The Viscosity should be of thecorrect rating.

Use of Engine Oil with only ACEAA1/B1 or only ACEA A5/B5 Qualityis prohibited, as it can cause longterm engine damage under certainoperating conditions.

Engine Oil Additives

The use of supplemental Engine OilAdditives could cause damage andinvalidate the warranty.

Engine Oil Viscosity Grades

The SAE Viscosity Grade givesinformation of the thickness ofthe Oil.

Multigrade Oil is indicated by twofigures:

The first figure, followed by a W,indicates the low temperatureViscosity and the second figureindicates the high temperatureViscosity.

SAE 5W-30 is the best ViscosityGrade for your vehicle. Do not useother Viscosity Grade Oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40 or 20W-50.

Cold temperature operation:

If operating your vehicle in an areaof extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below -25°C, aViscosity Grade SAE 0W-xx shouldbe used. An Oil of this ViscosityGrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures.



When selecting an Oil of theappropriate Viscosity Grade be sureto always select an Oil that meetsthe dexos™‚ Specification.. Down to -25°C: 5W-30, 5W-40.. Down to -25°C and below:

0W-30, 0W-40.

The SAE viscosity grade givesinformation of the thickness ofthe oil.

Coolant and antifreeze

Use only organic acid type-long lifecoolant (LLC) antifreeze.

In countries with moderate climatethe coolant provides freezeprotection down to approx. -35°C.

In countries with cold climate thecoolant provides freeze protectiondown to approx. -50°C. Thisconcentration should be maintainedall year-round.

Maintain a sufficient concentrationof anti-freeze.

Coolant additives intended to giveadditional corrosion protection orseal against minor leaks can causefunction problems. Liability forconsequences resulting from theuse of coolant additives will berejected.

Brake fluid

Only use our authorised brake fluidfor this vehicle(DOT 4).

Over time, brake fluid absorbsmoisture which will reduce brakingeffectiveness. The brake fluidshould therefore be replaced at thespecified interval.

Brake fluid should be stored in asealed container to avoid waterabsorption.

Ensure brake fluid does not becomecontaminated.

Power steering fluid

Only use Dexron VI fluid.

Manual gearbox fluid

Only use Castrol BOT 303 fluid.

Automatic transmission fluid

Only use Dexron VI fluid.

Transfer case fluid (AWD)

Only use synthetic hypoid 75W-90fluid.

Differential carrier assemblyfluid (AWD)

Only use synthetic hypoid 75W-90fluid.


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataEngine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Vehicle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is engraved the centre of thebulkhead.

Identification Plate

The identification label is on thedriver's door frame.


12-2 Technical Data

In some models, the label is locatedin the engine compartment.


Technical Data 12-3

Vehicle Data

Engine Data

Engine 2.4D 3.0 D 2.0 DSL2.2 DSL(163PS)

2.2 DSL(184PS)

Number of cylinders 4 6 4 4 4

Displacement [cc] 2384 2997 1998 2231 2231

Output [kW] at rpm 123 at 5600 190 at 6900 120 at 3800 120 at 3800 135 at 3800

Max. torque [Nm] at rpm 230 at 4600 288 at 5800400 at

1750~2250350 at

1500~3000400 at

1750~2750

Fuel type Petrol Diesel

Performance

Top speed

2.4D 3.0 D 2.0 DSL2.2 DSL(163PS)

2.2 DSL(184PS)

Manual transaxle (km/h)190 (FWD)

- -189 (FWD)

200186 (AWD) 184 (AWD)

Automatic transaxle (km/h) 175 198 187188 (FWD)

191182 (AWD)


12-4 Technical Data

Curb Weight

With driver (75kg)

2.4D5seat

2.4D7seat

3.0D5seat

3.0D7seat

2.0 DSL7 seat

2.2 DSL5 seat

2.2 DSL7 seat

Front wheeldrive (kg)

MT1768~1848

1793~1873 - - -

1853~1933

1878~1958

AT - - - -1978~2058

1878~1958

1903~1983

All wheel drive (kg)

MT 1843~1923

1848~1948

- - - 1928~2008

1953~2033

AT1868~1948

1893~1973

1890~1970

1915~1995

-1953~2033

1978~2058


Technical Data 12-5

Vehicle Dimensions

Length [mm] 4673

Width [mm] 1849

Height (with roof rack) [mm] 1756

Wheel base [mm] 2707

Track (Front) [mm] 1569

Track (Rear) [mm] 1576

Minimum turning radius [m] 11.87

Capacities and Specifications

Engine 2.4D 3.0 D DIESEL

Fuel tank [L] 65

Engine oil [L] 4.7 5.7 5.4


12-6 Technical Data

Tyre Pressure

Tyre size Wheel dimension

Pressure (psi/bar/kPa)

Front Rear

235/60R17 17x7J Below 4 occupants : 35/2.4/240(Eco. pressure : 38/2.6/260)Above 5 occupants, withtowing trailer : 35/2.4/240

Below 4 occupants : 35/2.4/240 (Eco. pressure :38/2.6/260)Above 5 occupants, withtowing trailer : 41/2.8/280

235/55R18 18x7J

235/50R19 19x7J

T155/90R16 (Temporary) 16X4T 60/4.2/420 60/4.2/420


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationDeclaration of Conformity . . . . 13-1

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyEvent Data Recorders . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer Information

Declaration of ConformityThis vehicle has systems thattransmit and/or receive radio wavessubject to Directive 1999/5/EC.

These systems are in compliancewith the essential requirements andother relevant provisions ofDirective 1999/5/EC. Copies of theoriginal Declarations of Conformitycan be obtained on our website.

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacy

Event Data RecordersThe vehicle has a number ofsophisticated systems that monitorand control several vehicle data.Some data may be stored duringregular operation to facilitate repairof detected malfunctions, other datais stored only in a crash or nearcrash event by systems commonlycalled event data recorders (EDR).

The systems may record data aboutthe condition of the vehicle and howit was operated.

To read this data special equipmentand access to the vehicle isrequired. This will take place whenthe vehicle is serviced in a repairer.Some data is electronically fed intoGM global diagnostic systems.


13-2 Customer Information

2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Adjustable Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14AdjustmentsSeat, Initial Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3, 8-6Air Conditioning RegularOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15AirbagsCurtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Safety Belt Tensioner Light . . .5-18Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Apply Foot brake Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25AudioBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine Start/Stop Feature . . . . . 9-4Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Automatic TransmissionFault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Interruption of PowerSupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Selector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Transmission Display . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-24BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-87

Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Bonnet Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20

Brake lamps and Reversing LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27


i-2 INDEX

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Bulb ReplacementCentre High-MountedBrake lamp (CHMBL) . . . . . 10-28

Front Indicator Lamps . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Headlamps and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Number Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-28Side Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . 10-28Tail lamps, Indicator,Brake lamps, andReversing Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-27

CCamera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Central Locking System . . . . . . . . 2-8Centre Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-4Centre High-MountedBrake lamp (CHMBL) . . . . . . . 10-28

Chains, Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-19CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Child Restraint InstallationLocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Child Restraint SystemsTop Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

Child RestraintsInstallation Locations . . . . . . . . .3-23ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Climate Control SystemElectronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Climate Control SystemsAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Heating and Ventilation . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7CompartmentLuggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Computer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29ConformityDeclaration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Load Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Misted Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


INDEX i-3

Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4Curtain Airbag System . . . . . . . . . 3-19

DDanger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . 13-1Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . 13-1Descent Control SystemLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Diesel Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Diesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . . . . 9-7Diesel Particulate FilterLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DimensionsVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5

DisplaysAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-9Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Driver InformationCentre (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

EElectrical SystemFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Electronic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-20Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Electronic Stability ControlIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

End-of-Life VehicleRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Automatic Start/StopFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-24Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-25Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Engine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3EnginesDiesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Petrol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . 13-1Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1


i-4 INDEX

FFault, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

FilterDiesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Diesel Particulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Flat TyreChanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Fog Lamp Light, Rear . . . . . . . . . 5-25Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Seat-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Front Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-27Front Seat Position SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-24Petrol Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Water in Fuel WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Fuel for Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . 9-32Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

GGaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Mileometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Gauges (cont'd)Rev Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Transmission Display . . . . . . . . .5-17

Getting Started, Navigation . . . . 7-42Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

HHands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88Hazard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Headlamp Range Adjustment . . . 6-4HeadlampsAutomatic Light Control . . . . . . . . 6-2Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Main-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25Main/Dipped Beam Changer . . . 6-3Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7


INDEX i-5

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-6Heating and VentilationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9, 5-3

IIdentification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2ImmobiliserLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17InformationService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Information on Loading theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Instrument PanelOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Interruption of Power Supply . . . 9-12Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

ISOFIX Child RestraintSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-28Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-4Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Front Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19Misted Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lamps (cont'd)Rear Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Side Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

LightDiesel Particulate Filter . . . . . . .5-23Electronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Pre-Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

LightsAirbag and Safety BeltTensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Apply Foot brake . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Automatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Bonnet Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Descent Control System . . . . . .5-21


i-6 INDEX

Lights (cont'd)Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Fog Lamp, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Low Engine Oil Level . . . . . . . . .5-24Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Main-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Main/Dipped Beam Changer . . . 6-3Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-25Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . .5-17Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-19Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) Warning . . .5-22

Tail lamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Trailer Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Ultrasonic Parking Sensor . . . .5-22Water in Fuel Warning . . . . . . . .5-24

Lights, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Load CompartmentCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8LocksCentral Locking System . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Manual Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Low Engine Oil Level Light . . . . 5-24Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 4-6

MMain-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25MaintenanceAir Conditioning RegularOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19Manual Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

MenuSetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-76

MessagesBrake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Mileometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Misted Lamp Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Monitor System, TyrePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

NNavigationGetting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-51

New Vehicle Run-In . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2


INDEX i-7

OOilChange Engine Oil Light . . . . . .5-24Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Low Engine Oil Level Light . . .5-24Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Open & Start System . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Other Service ItemsAir Conditioning System . . . . . . . 8-3

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Overview, NavigationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

PParking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Ultrasonic Sensor Light . . . . . . .5-22

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-87Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-88

PowerOutlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-25Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Pre-Heat Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

PressureTyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6

RRadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Rear Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Rear Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-29Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6Rear WindowsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . 2-16Repair KitTyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Rev Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Reversing Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-20Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-20


i-8 INDEX

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Roof Panelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Rotation, Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Running-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . 9-2

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Three-Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Seat BeltsReminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Folding Seat-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Position, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Selector Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Service and MaintenanceService Information . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76Side Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Side Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . 10-28Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Start SystemOpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3SteeringFluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

StorageLoad Compartment Cover . . . . . 4-6Luggage Compartment . . . . . . . . 4-6Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Storage AreasCentre Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Information on Loading theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Panelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

SystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7


INDEX i-9

TTail lamp Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-26Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10TaillightsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Technical DataTyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6

Three-Point Safety Belt . . . . . . . . 3-14Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Top Tether Child RestraintSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

TowingVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Trailer Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Transmission Display . . . . . 5-17, 9-9Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Tyre Pressure MonitoringSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Tyre Repair Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42TyresChains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-39Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Wheel Alignment andTyre Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tyres and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-26Ultrasonic Parking SensorLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Vehicle CareTyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Vehicle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Vehicle IdentificationPlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle RecoveryEnd-of-Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2VentilationAdjustable Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Fixed Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21


i-10 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Water in Fuel Warning Light . . . 5-24WeightsCurb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4

Wheel Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41WheelsAlignment and TyreBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38WindowsHeated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindscreenWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Winter Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-24WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

2014 chevrolet captiva owner manual m britain... · chevrolet captiva owner manual - 2014 - crc -...

Documents